Home

QSCPU User`s Manual (Function Explanation, Program

1. TableApp 10 Special register z 2 Set by Corresponding FF Number Name Meanin Explanation a 9 p When set CPU ki Individual information corresponding to error codes SD0 is 8 stored here a SD16 There are the following ten different types of information are stored D 2 File name Drive name 2 8 Number Meaning Example File name re SD17 SD16 Drive MAIN QPG SD17 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 3 SD18 File name 41H A 4Dx M e SD19 ASCII code 8 characters 4EH N 43H I aE SD20 20H SP 20H SP SD21 Extension 3 2EH ee a SD22 ASCII code 3 characters H Q 2EH SD18 SD23 47H G 50H P 7 SD24 2 o0 SD5 Empty 23 SD26 z z 3 Time value Actually measured amp 2 Sie SD19 Number Meaning Bo SD16 Time 14s units 0 to 9994s 8 SD17 Time 1ms units 0 to 65535ms aoa SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD20 SD22 Empty SD23 SD24 SD25 2 SD26 amp g 4 Program error location 2 SD21 Error E hdividiai Number Meaning a eee rror individual individual SD16 S Error Qs information information SD17 File name SD18 ASCII code 8 characters SD19 SD20 Extension 3 2EH SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 SD22 Empty SD23 Block No 6 SD24 Step No 6 se SD25 Sequence step No L 2 SD26 Sequence step No H ic 6 0 is stored to the block number and the step number SD23 i 5 Parameter No 6 Annunciator number Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Pa
2. 5 3 fe Cg ouTYn L Equivalent to internal relay Diagram 9 8 Substitute for internal relay 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 F 9 2 2 Output Y Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aLS 26 Qs em 9 2 3 Internal relay M 1 Definition Internal relays are auxiliary relays used in the CPU module All internal relays are switched OFF at the following times e When the programmable controller is powered OFF and then ON e When the CPU module is reset 2 Number of used N O and NIC contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceeded No restrictions on the quantity used MO switches ON at X100 OFF to ON T SET MO The internal relay MO ON can only be used for internal CPU module processing and cannot be K20 output externally TO lt Y100 MO ON OFF information is output from the CC Link safety remote I O unit to an external destination lt M100 lt M2047 Diagram 9 9 Use of internal relays in program 3 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external destination 9 8 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 3 Internal relay M Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em 9 2 4 Annunciator F 1 Definition Annunciators are internal relays used for faul
3. Table3 2 That Can and Cannot Be Cleared with Each Data Clearing Method 3 Data clear methods 5 Data item lt Rean Power restart PLC memory PLE memory PLG memory Clear history 5 operation clear format initialization a Program memory 2 e data x x O O x Q Standard ROM P R O 7 data 1 Device data O O O x O x 3 Safety CPU 2 operation mode i x O 2 i gO gt CPU access P E y x O x password ee OG Clock data x x x x O x Operation and error history 3 i O 3 0 4 ROM write count x x x x x x O Data cleared x Data not cleared 1 When the program memory is copied into ROM using GX Developer the standard ROM data is first cleared then the program memory is written into standard ROM 5 2 When PLC memory initialization is executed the safety CPU operation mode becomes TEST MODE E 3 After the history is erased the following PLC memory initialization operation and error history is recorded OP005 SYSTEM INITIALIZE PLC MEMORY OP100 POWER ON 2200 MISSING PARAMETER Se 4 After the operation and error history is erased the following operation history is recorded z 2 OP200 CLEAR OPERATION ERROR LOG 25 Remar eeeeeeeseeeeoeeeaeseeoeaeeoeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeee eee e ee ee 6 528 For details on GX Developer operation methods refer to the following manual L gt GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual L gt GX Developer Version 8 Operating manual
4. Set b Number Name Meaning Explanation n sai Bit corresponding to the station number turns 1 when the master station goes to the interlock status after the error was detected at the master station Safety station D1272 interlock 0 Interlock is b15 b14 to b1 b0 to status CC not executed SD1272 16 15 to 2 1 S Status Link 1 During change SD1275 Safety master interlock SD1273 32 31 to 18 17 module 2 SD1274 48 47 to 34 33 SD1275 64 63 to 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Cancel the I O interlock of safety station by changing the bit of 0 I O interlock A register from 0 to 1 of safety wn sa ae se b15 b14 to b1 bO sp1276 interloc ink Safety cancelrequest not released SD1276 16 15 to 2 1 to H U Request Safety master of safety module 2 station on CC SD1278 48 47 to 34 33 Link Safety SD1279 64 63 to 50 49 released App 22 Appendix 2 Special Register List 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers CPU Qs APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie 8 CC Link IE Field Network k fe TableApp 18 Special register g Set by Corresponding g Number Name Meanin Explanation 2 g P When set CPU 3 The safety communication setting status for each station is stored
5. 005 2 2 Special Relay List App 1 Specifications 000000 02ers 2 1 ST Retentive timer 00000 e ee 9 20 Standard ROM 000055 2 1 5 7 SLOP ETTOR sot esha a a N a olen aa T 6 28 STOP status 0 0 aa a ee eee 3 9 SW Link special register 9 31 System configuration Sequence control language 2 1 System monitor 0 0 00 cee 6 64 T Tl CRIMOR 4 8 Secs atte kisi Gabe pire i eas ee ees 9 18 Tim r Te ick e a a a n A 2 2 Timer function 0 0000 e eee eee 2 2 Timer limit setting 00000 e eee 8 3 U User setting system area 0 04 5 4 V V Edge relay 1 2 0 0 eee 9 14 W W Link register 020 ee eae 9 29 Watchdog timer setting 4 6 58 Write Write to program memory 4 5 6 x X PPU 2 cca ee eet ead 9 5 X Y assignment check 8 8 8 9 Y Output o2 yeatweeioR es thao canta 9 7 Index 2 Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Limited Warranty and Product Support a Mitsubishi Electric Company MELCO warrants that for a period of eighteen 18 months after date of delivery from the point of manufactur
6. K words K words K bits The total number of device points is up to 12384 words High speed area XO C511 Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check End Cancel Default value For device whose number of points can be changed number of used points can be changed Diagram 9 1 Device in PLC parameter dialog box 2 Internal user device setting range The number of used points of internal user devices other than CPU module input X output Y link special relay SB or link special register SW can be changed within the range of 9 75K words with the PLC parameter device settings The following gives more information a Setting range The number of device points is designated in 16 point units A maximum of 32K points can be designated for one device 1 point is calculated as 2 points 1 for coil 1 for contact for the timer retentive timer and counter 9 2 Internal User Devices Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES erie 3 Memory capacity Use the following expression to obtain the memory capacity of an internal user device c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a Bit device capacity Word device capacity Timer retentive timer and counter capacity lt 12384 words a For bit devices For bit devices 16 points are calculated as 1 word Total number of points of X Y M B F SB V words 16 Bit device capacity CPU
7. Appendix 9 Safety CPU Module Upgrade 1 Additional functions and availability of the functions according to the i version of GX Developer TableApp 38 Additional functions and availability of the functions according to the version of GX Developer p New function vompatlble Compatible serial No compatible function version Developer a Response performance enhancement 3 CC 3 Link Safety System Master Module User s Manual a CC Link IE Controller Network compatibility 37 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 7 MELSECNET H transient transmission function 23 C gt Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network F System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Se Ethernet compatibility gt Q Corresponding B38 Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic C gt Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Dedicated instruction compatibility lt 37 Appendix 7 3 CC Link IE Controller 10032 or later Network Reference Manual L gt Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network 3 Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic lt 3 Q Corresponding Ethernet A Interface Module User s Manual Application MC protocol lt 3 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Version 8 65T or later Appendices Index Clock data change function using special relay and
8. Set the CPU module to STOP Set the CPU module RUN STOP RESET switch to the STOP position 2 8 oUs ees Bae A 2 Display safety CPU operation mode screen 8 58 The safety CPU operation mode screen is displayed zE g with the following operations O Online Safety CPU operation gt Switch operation mode Switch to safety CPU operation mode S E 3 lt 5 Current operation mode S Z Q 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching execution 8 Click the switching Execute switch button g 5 A Ba Ss OG MELSOFT series GX Developer 2I N Switching to safety mode Please ensure that the program has been tested sufficiently in the application environment Switch to operation mode Select Safety CPU operation mode switching execution 9 Ss Click the Yes button 2 T 1 Continued to the next page Diagram 6 5 TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE switching 35 Se or SB o EOS EGS SEs p oO S 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching FUNCTIONS 1 Are the programs and parameters of GX Developer the same with those of program memory YES Are the parameters and programs of the program memory and those of standard ROM the same MELSOFT series GX Developer i Switch to safety mode completed Check the condition of connection device and restart or reset PLC NO a6 Series MELSOFT series GX Developer
9. CC Link Safety master module CC Link Safety master module ICC Link IE Controller Network module Empty Execution Conditions Sequence Program Configuration and 32 32 OOH 20H 40H 5 5 I O number 1FH 3FH 5FH Diagram 4 1 I O number assignment example w N 1 0 point A For the empty slot where no CC Link Safety master module or CC Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on the main base unit the points set on the PLC system setting tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer are assigned Default 16 points E oO E E D N n lt fo pe i Zz ie The start I O number can be changed for each slot on the I O assignment setting tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files 4 2 2 O numbers of remote station It is possible to assign input X and output Y of the CPU module to the remote station I O modules and control the modules in the CC Link Safety Functions 1 CPU module I O numbers that can be used at remote stations When two CC Link Safety master modules and one CC Link IE controller module are mounted on the main base unit the CPU module uses X Y0 to X Y5F When using CPU module input X and output Y for remote station I O numbers use X Y60 or later Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 4 2 Concept of I O Number Assignment 4 2 4
10. End Cancel Diagram 8 4 Device Table8 4 Device list Description Set the number of used device points according to the system 8 1 PLC Parameters Setting range X 6K points Y 6K points 1536 SB 1536 points and SW 1536 points are fixed Can be set within the range of total 12384 words including the above number of points 2400 words 1 device Max 32K points Default value 4 lt nN 7102 lt xX 6K points 6K points 6K points 2K points 1K points 1536 points 1K points 512 points OK points 512 points 6K points 2K points 1536 points Reference Section 9 1 PARAMETERS MELSEC LES res 5 Boot file Set whether a boot from the standard ROM will be executed or not x amp QS Parameter 5 PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Boot file I 0 assignment Safety setting 9 I Do boot from standard ROM This setting is valid only for test mode Safety mode settings uses standard ROM boot Oc T ALE FE SeS A 2 O OX N O W Acknowledge XY assignment CDak check End Cancel S C Diagram 8 5 Boot file lt 5 5 Q Table8 5 Boot file list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference At TEST MODE Sofwheiher t0 Do not execute boot Execute 8 3 Boot file boot from the standard ROM or eet Do not execute boot Section 5 1 4 2 not g a 2 a Ba S5 POINT
11. Signal flow Save ba Diagram 6 4 Safety CPU operation mode display using GX Developer 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 2 Checking safety CPU operation mode 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LOS cries 3 Checking with a special relay or a special register The current safety CPU operation mode is stored in the special relay SM560 TEST MODE flag and special register SD560 safety CPU operation mode in the CPU module The safety CPU operation mode can be externally displayed using SM560 or SD560 in a program The safety CPU operation mode can be also checked by monitoring SM560 or SD560 with GX Developer Overview Performance Specification Table6 3 Special relay special register for confirming safety CPU operation mode Device name Name Description Shows whether the current safety CPU operation mode is TEST MODE or not SM560 TEST MODE flag OFF SAFETY MODE or SAFETY MODE wait for 35 restart BBs ON TEST MODE ae 3 MASA Shows the current safety CPU operation mode Safety CPU e 0 SAFETY MODE operation mode 1 TEST MODE e 2 SAFETY MODE wait for restart SD560 1 O Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 a7 6 2 2 Checking safety CPU operation mode 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES res 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode sw
12. Set b Number Name Meaning Explanation einen i SM400 Always ON mo Normally is ON S Every END SM401 Always OFF al Normally is OFF S Every END After RUN ON ON 4 SM402 i 1 scan e After RUN ON for 1 ly S E END 2 for 1 scan only OFF gt si i AEA Every After RUN OFF ON SM4 e After RUN OFF for 1 ly S E END 93 for 1 scan only OFF tare ei PRAA Every 0 1 second 0 05s Suto clock 0 05s 0 2 second dis e Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at SM411 clock 0 1s each designated time interval When programmable controller power supply is S Status change SM412 1 second clock 9 55 aes turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start 1s SM413 2 second clock 1s e This relay alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time unit s specified in SD414 If the value of SD414 is changed the time that has passed after the previous ON OFF interval of SM414 is counted as the next interval and the ON OFF status is changed at the next interval that is newly specified Example When the value of SD414 is changed 2 F from 3 to 10 n secon ns SM414 lock n S Status change App 4 Appendix 1 Special Relay List previous ON OFF interval of SM414 is counted as the next interval Ol 3 ON seconds lt lt 1s SM414 OFF 3 seconds 10 seconds sja fe time that has passed after the y 10 4 seconds sp414 C3 is 10
13. 5 The specified abort code is stored by the S QSABORT instruction 12 File diagnostics information Number Meaning Example File name Error MAIN QPG SD16 information Drive No b15 to b8 b7 to b0 41H A 4DH M SD17 Maman i 4EH N 43H I SD18 File name 20H SP 20H SP emal H Hi ASCII code 8 ch t see code 8 characters 20H SP 20H SP D21 Extension 3 __ 2EH O SD22 ASCII code 3 characters Oooo eee SD23 l SD24 Error information 2 SD25 A M SD26 Error information 3 13 CC Link IE Field Network information Number Meaning SD16 Number of items for individual information SD17 individual information 1 SD18 individual information 2 SD19 individual information 3 SD20 individual information 4 SD21 individual information 5 SD22 individual information 6 SD23 individual information 7 SD24 individual information 8 SD25 individual information 9 SD26 individual information 10 Appendix 2 Special Register List Set by When set S Error AG Qs em Corresponding CPU Qs APPENDICES MELSEC ES erie TableApp 10 Special register z 2 Set b Cc di S Number Name Meaning Explanation hien a ae ma p i The identifier of the CPU module that issued the diagnostics 8 Diagnostics 3 es j z CPU identifier error SDO to SD26 is stored a SD27
14. Cyclic transmission function Communication by LB LW O Communication by LX LY Link refresh Direct access to link devices Assurance of cyclic data integrity CPU Module Processing Time Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance Constant link scan Reserved station specification Interlink data transfer function Cyclic transmission stop restart Olx OJOlIOlO Ix OIO Procedure for Writing Transienttransmission function Reading writing data from to word device on another station READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE Clock data read write Oj O Transient request to another station REQ Remote RUN STOP Sending receiving data SEND RECV x a x Receiving data on another station for interrupt program RECVS Reading writing data from to word device on another station ZNRD ZNWR x Remote RUN STOP RRUN RSTOP x Reading writing clock data from to the CPU module on another station RTMRD RTMWR GX Developer access to other stations O Changing number of transient transmissions Group function Routing function Time setting from GX Developer RAS function Control station switching function Loopback function optical loop system Automatic return function Cable fault detection function Cable insertion error detection function Duplicated control station or station No detection function Transient
15. Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions 5 18 5 3 4 File size units D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M aL 26 SS Memo 5 19 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions 5 3 4 File size units 6 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER6 FUNCTIONS Function of CPU module is as follows 6 1 Function List Functions of CPU module are listed in Table6 1 Table6 1 CPU module function list Description AG Qs em Safety CPU operation d Reference SAFETY TEST MODE MODE Selects whether to normally operate the CPU module as part of the safety device or to carry out maintenance on Safety CPU operation mode i O O Section 6 2 the CPU module using program changes and device test functions Prevents incorrect operations from GX Developer CPU access password j O O Section 6 3 connected by mistake Erases user data written to the CPU module When the PLC memory initialization PLC memory is initialized data is returned to its factory O O Section 6 4 settings status Setting for preventing continuous RUN Prevents the programmable controller system from Section 6 5 x i in TEST MODE running continuously for long periods in TEST MODE ROM write count check Checks the number of writing to ROM O O Section 6 6 Self Diagnosis function En
16. Necessary setting Nosetting Alreadyset When making a remote password enabled write parameters to the PLC and reset the PLC or tum off the power and turn on the power again Cancel Clear Setting completion Cancel Setting completion Diagram 8 13 Remote password setting screens The remote password for the Ethernet module is set Table8 15 List of remote password setting items Parameter No Setting range Default value Reference Description Enter the remote password Within 4 characters alphabets _ Password settings set numerals symbols Select the module model of the Model name QJ71E71 R remote password check target Password active Set the start address of the module settings Start XY module targeted for the remote 0000 to O3E0 a password check Remote password detail settings Set the remote password details in the QJ71E71 System connection Specify the remote password valid port of the system connection valid port Auto open UDP port GX Developer transmission port TCP IP GX Developer transmission port UDP IP Dedicated instruction CC IE Control MELSECNET 10 H relay transmission port Refer to the User connection No Set the user connection number Connection 1 to 16 ss Ethernet Specify the remote password manual 8 15 8 3 Remote Password Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs es CHAPTERS D
17. O O O x x 2 s O O O O O x x g z x x x x x x x 25 25 x x O O x x x E 5 x x O O x x x O O x O O x x O O O O O x x x x O Oo Oo x x O O O O O x x x x x x x x x 5 O O O O O x x E O O O O O x x E O O O O O x x x O O z x O O x x E S x x x x x x S g EE x x x x x x 2 82 528 x O O x x x Oo O x x SES O The function operates x The function does not operate This combination does not exist 1 Indicates the stop error due to moderate error or severe error For details on moderate errors and severe errors refer to the following manual L gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Parameters 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 5 Online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Developer D 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES ries 6 3 CPU access password 1 What a CPU access password is To prevent incorrect operations from a GX Developer connected by mistake the CPU module authenticates access using a password This password for authenticating access is called as the CPU access password The CPU access password must be set in both the GX Developer project and the CPU module When an operation changing control for example a program change is executed from GX Developer the CPU module compares the GX
18. Slot Type Model name Points Starts 0 PLC PLC x x Switch setting 1_ O 0 Intelli X 32points__v 0040 2 1 1 Intell x 32points v _ 0020 3 2f 2 Intell X 32points__v 4 3 3 x X Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Diagram 4 4 I O assignment with overlapping start XY Automatically assigned slot Base unit CPU r e Slot number o N E m po CC Link Safety master module CC Link Safety master module amp w CC Link IE Controller Network module Empty 8 x rie Bl 5 32 32 40H 20H 6 SEH 3FH SEH Start XY overlaps Number of I O points seen I O number Diagram 4 5 Start XY set by above I O assignment Be extremely careful not to overlap the start XY of each slot Overlapping start XY will result in an error MODULE LAYOUT ERROR 4 3 I O Assignment by GX Developer 4 3 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer iN Communication with Intelligent Function Module Sequence Program Configuration and Overview Performance Specification Execution Conditions A Memories and Files E oO E E D N n lt fo pe i Zz ie Handled by CPU Module Functions Parameters 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT M aLS HC QS eres 4 3 3 Examples o
19. 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES eres 6 10 Setting of Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN 1 Definition When changed from the RUN status to the STOP status the CPU module stores the output Y in the RUN status into the programmable controller and turns all outputs Y OFF Status when changing from STOP to RUN can be selected from the following two options with parameters in GX Developer e The output Y status prior to STOP is output e The output Y is cleared 2 Setting applications Using a holding circuit or similar it is possible to select whether the output is resumed from the previous status or not when the STOP status is changed to the RUN status Start Stop button button x100 X102 r g Y110 Y110 1 Diagram 6 18 Holding circuit e When the output Y status prior to STOP is set to output RUN STOP STOP RUN l l ON X100 OFF l X102 OFF ON i i Y110 OFF Diagram 6 19 Timing chart when output Y status prior to STOP is set to output e When output Y is set to clear RUN gt STOP STOP RUN ON X100 OFF X102 OFF ON Y110 OFF Diagram 6 20 Timing chart when output Y is set to clear 6 42 6 10 Setting of Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN 6 FUNCTIONS M LS AG lN 3 Operation switching from STOP status to RUN status a Output Y status prior to STOP is output Default A
20. E Diagram 5 8 Copy program memory data into ROM screen 3 Select the write destination and copy the program memory files to the standard ROM Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 12 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE 5 13 MELSEC LES erie 4 Additions changes to standard ROM files in TEST MODE Since all files stored in the standard ROM are automatically deleted when files are to be written to the standard ROM additions changes to the stored files cannot be made directly Observe the following steps 1 Choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer and read all files from the standard ROM 2 Make necessary additions changes to the read files 3 Write the modified files to the program memory 4 Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM and copy these files to the program memory 5 Precautions in TEST MODE a Setting of check at communication time of GX Developer When files are written to the standard ROM with the communication time check time set to 180 seconds or less on GX Developer they are checked 180 seconds 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELEGEN res 5 2 Program File
21. For standard stations 0 is stored 4 c 3 b15 b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 3 oO D1400 16 15 to 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o Setting status SD1401 32 31 to 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 3 SD1400 of safety 0 Not set D1402 48 47 to 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 i Se to communicatio S Initial as Re p1407 n with each 1 Set SD1403 64 63 to 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 station D1404 80 79 to 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 SD1405 96 95 to 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 A SD1406 112 111 to 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 28 SD1407 to 120 119 118 117 116 115 114113 gt kone 1 to 120 in the table indicate station numbers z 3 Fixed to 0 Ze 88 0 Normal ee Reseed The communication status with each safety station is stored station For standard stations 0 is stored specified unused b15 b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO station sD1420 16 15 to 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2414 standard p1421 32 31 to 126 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 a Safety refresh station on 8 D1420 communicatio CC Link IE D1422 48 47 to 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 S Status g to n status of Field D1423 64 63 to 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 as amp SD1427 each safet N k change lt y etwork
22. Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 15 Watchdog Timer WDT 6 59 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 6 16 Remote password 1 2 Definition Remote password is a function to prevent an illegal access to the CPU module by users in remote locations If a remote password is set a remote password check is performed when the CPU module is accessed by users in remote locations Flow from remote password setting to reflection Set a remote password using GX Developer and then write it to the CPU module 6 in this section The remote password is transferred to the modules that accept remote password setting gt 3 in this section when the programmable controller is powered OFF ON at power ON or the reset operation of the CPU module is performed at reset Ethernet Ethernet module The remote password is checked The remote password is transferred to the Ethernet module at power ON or reset GX Developer sets changes or deletes the remote password and then write the result to the CPU module Diagram 6 29 Overview of remote password 6 60 6 16 Remote password FUNCTIONS MELEGEN res 3 Modules that support remote password setting The module that support remote password setting is Ethernet module only Overview 4 Remote password lock unlock processing The r
23. Safety Safety Ao NET H AO AO RO H gt 4 Cannot be connected coT A2 AO Cannot be connected Can be connected up to i 0O i i QSCPU em acpu QCPU CC Link A1 afety A2 B2 A2 A1 i GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT A1 A2 B2 A2 A2 i ascpu CC Link Ethernet A3 Safety A3 A3 l Can be connected up to GXD1 7 layers in the system A3 s Ethernet CClEcont QCPU QCPU Ethernet or C24 R ClEcont A4 B4 A4 NETH aa ascpu CC Link A4 ae Safety NETH l l A6 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXxD1 GOT GXD1 A4 B4 A4 A4 A5 AO GXD1 7 layers in the system A6 C CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H Bus ICClEcont GOT connection QCPU QCPU or CC Link C24 Ethernet A7 A7 NET H A7 A7 B7 A7 RS 232 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GOT AT A7 B7 A7 A7 A8 CC Link E o QCPU QCPU CC Link A9 B9 A9 GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT A9 B9 A9 A9 App 48 Fig App 6 Access range Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie b Accessibility TableApp 36 Accessibility Device Explanation Access
24. The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the programmable controller For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in TableApp 9 TableApp 9 Descriptions of the special register list headings Item Function of Item Number e Indicates special register number Name e Indicates name of special register Meaning e Indicates contents of special register Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Explanation e Discusses contents of special register in more detail e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Set by Indicated only for registers set by system When set Every END Set during every END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Se
25. annunciators execution SD64 e When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F the F numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are SD65 registered SD66 The F numbers turned OFF by are deleted from SD64 SD79 and the F numbers stored after the deleted F SD67 numbers are shifted to the preceding registers SD68 After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 5 17th will not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SD69 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET RST F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38F110F151F210 F50 SD70 A w a a Va Came Vea Ca Vane Vea Va Va sp62L0_ 50 50150150150 50150150 50 50 50 99 Number eel Table of detected SD71 able o Annunciator detected soes 0 1 213 T2 3 T4 5 6 7 8 T9 8 hae S Instruction SD72 3 detection detected annunciator b jetected execution numbers Maa SD64 0 50 SD73 SD65 0 0 SD66 0 0 SD74 SD67 0 0 ji SD68 0 0 SD75 spe9 0 0 SD70 0 0 SD76 SD71 0 0 Number sp72 0 0 detected SD73 0 0 Soy SD74 0 0 SD75 0 0 SD78 SD76 0 0 SD77 0 0 SD79 SD78 0 0 SD79 0 0 Appendix 2 Special Register List App 13 APPENDICES TableApp 10 Special register EL SEC LM eres Number Meaning Explanation Set by C
26. 0 1ms unit 10ms by default 0 point by default sharing of the low and high speed retentive timers n changeable 5 Lae The low and high speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions 8 Retentive timer ST ae The measurement unit of the low and high speed retentive timers is set 2 up by parameters z Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit 100ms by default zZ High speed retentive timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit 10ms by default Counter C Normal counter 512 points by default CO to 511 changeable Data register D 6144 points by default DO to 6143 changeable Link register W 2048 points by default WO to 7FF changeable Annunciator F 1024 points by default FO to 1023 changeable Edge relay V 1024 points by default VO to 1023 changeable MELSEC LES res Remarks The number of points can be changed within the setting range Section 9 2 Link special relay SB 1536 points SBO to 5FF Link special register SW 1536 points SWO to 5FF Special relay SM Special register SD 5120 points SMO to 5119 5120 points SDO to 5119 The number of device points is fixed RUN PAUSE contact Timer function One contact can be set up in X0 to 17FF for each of RUN No PAUSE contact Year month date hour minute second and day of week leap year automatically identified
27. 1 85 x number of words to be refreshed 1000 us For the number of words to be refreshed refer to the following manual MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual b CC Link IE Controller Network refresh time This is the time required to refresh data between the link devices of the CC Link IE Controller Network module and the devices of the CPU module The CC Link IE Controller Network refresh time Tmnet will be calculated with the following formula Tmnet 1 85 x number of words to be refreshed 1000 us For the number of words to be refreshed refer to the following manual lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual MELSECNETIH refresh time This is the time required to refresh data between the link devices of the MELSECNET H module and the devices of the CPU module The MELSECNETHH refresh time Tmnet will be calculated with the following formula Tmnet 1 85 x number of words to be refreshed 1000 us For the number of words to be refreshed refer to the following manual C gt Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network c d CC Link Safety auto refresh time This is the time required to refresh data between the CC Link Safety master module and the CPU module For the CC Link Safety auto refresh time refer to the following manual L gt CC Link Safety System Master Module User s Manual 6 Common processing time This indica
28. 6 66 LED display for error fie eae tri neds ne e DA E Ea 6 32 Link register W 00 0000 ee eee eee 9 29 Link register W 22202005 2 2 Link relay B jie Scree nete cee eee 9 15 Link relay B 2 20000 eee ee eeee 2 2 Link special register SW 20 9 31 Link special register SW 2 2 Link special relay SB 2000 9 17 Link special relay SB 2 2 2 Low speed retentive timer 9 20 Low speed timers 2000 0050 9 18 M M Internal relay 2 0 0 0 eee eee 9 8 Max number of files stored 2 1 Maximum counting speed 9 27 Memory capacities of flles 5 17 Memory capacity 0 0 00 eee eee 2 1 Memory configuration 00000 0 5 1 Momentary Power Failure 3 11 MOnitOf o yesa nd oie aha aia andes Pontes Sed Sess 6 54 N N Nesting 0 0 00 eee 9 34 Nesting IN eiae wenden es A EE Ree 9 34 Network parameters 5 8 10 No of device points 2005 2 2 No of I O device points 2 1 Number of empty slots 000 8 3 0 Output Y status when changing from the STOP status to the RUN status 6 44 P Parameter Network Parameters 4 8 10 PLC Parameters 2 005 8 2 PLC name setting
29. 8 8 C S 3 wn Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Diagram 8 3 PLC RAS Table8 3 PLC RAS list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference WDT atchd WDT Set th tchdog ti f watehdog i 30004 et tne watendog timer value OF 4 Oms to 2000ms 10ms unit 200ms Section 3 2 timer setting the CPU module setting Constant scanning 30034 Set the constant scan time 1ms to 2000ms 1ms unit No setting Section 6 9 S 8 c E z Q 0 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 4 Performance Specification Configuration and Memories and Files Intelligent Function Module Overview 1 O Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Functions g o 2 E a Item Device points PARAMETERS 4 Device Set the number of used points and latch range for each device 2000 Parameter No QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLCRAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 end d The total number of device points is up to 12384 words Device total K words High speed area X0 C511 Word device K words Bit device 135 Kbits ig Dev Sym Dig pork ZAIR 10 Latch 2 Latch 2 start end EL SEC LM eres Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check
30. E Edge relay V 02 000 E eee 9 14 Edge relay V 0 0 e eee eee 2 2 EXtensioni a Wee a cSt Lo id Se Se E ah 5 2 F F Annunciator 0 000 eee eee 9 9 Features ies fuels a ae peed Beale EE 1 2 File reeset pentane tases enna aban ten a 5 14 File size units reevei ee 5 18 Formatting necessities 000 5 2 H H Hexadecimal constant 9 35 HEX Hexadecimal 000 eae 3 17 Hexadecimal constant H 9 35 High speed retentive timer 9 20 High speed timers 000 eae 9 19 How to check the function version 1 10 How to Check the Serial No 1 10 l I O assignment 0 00 cee eee 4 5 I O assignment setting 00 4 5 I O control mode nauau 0 0 eee eee 2 1 VO NUMbBE sia2 ea 4 cole pe ehalee odie deeds 4 1 I O number assignment 00 4 1 Va teresi ue taane tng nade adnate we 3 8 Initial processing 0 eee eee eee 3 7 Input X sataet Gea ateoua eee eae awe ST 9 5 Intelligent function module dedicated instruction 7 3 Internal current consumption 2 2 Internal relay M 000 e eee eee eee 9 8 Internal relay M 2 22000 2 2 Internal User Devices 00 005 9 2 K K Decimal constant 000 9 35 L LED LED display ic actonseaacaeet AEE RA 6 66 Method to turn off the LED
31. K c 2 w E s G x if Q 2 gt o a 1 Definition Decimal constants are devices that designate decimal data in sequence programs Specify it as K example K1234 in a sequence program i It is stored in binary BIN into the CPU module lt Section 3 7 1 o 2 Designation range aE The designation ranges for decimal constants are as follows e For word data 16 bits esescsscsesesseseesesesees K 32768 to 32767 For 2 word data 32 bits serseeessseeeeeeeeeseeeK 2147483648 to 2147483647 lt 2 a POINT T The most significant bit is a sign bit E a 9 5 2 Hexadecimal constant H 1 Definition 9 Hexadecimal constants are devices which designate hexadecimal or BCD data in 2 sequence programs ca For BCD data designations 0 to 9 digit designations are used Hexadecimal constants are designated as H settings e g H1234 lt gt Section 3 7 2 2 Designation range The setting ranges for hexadecimal constants are as follows For word data 16 bits eseeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeee HO to FFFF HO to 9999 for BCD For 2 word data 32 bits ssesseeeeesseseeeseeeee HO to FFFFFFFF HO to 99999999 for BCD 9 5 Constants 9 5 1 Decimal constant K 9 oo CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME M aL E QS cries CHAPTER10 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME This chapter explains the CPU module processing time 10 1 Scan Time This section explains the scan time structures
32. Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module error Transient transmission error detection time check O O O O O JO xX x Oo Diagnostic function To the next page App 32 Appendix 5 Restrictions on Using MELSECNET H Module with Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELS AG Qs ie TableApp 22 List of MELSECNETI H functions and their availability in safety CPU module continued Function Availability Direct access to link devices x Interrupt sequence program startup Multiplex transmission function optical loop system Simple dual structured network function Cyclic transmission stop restart and link refresh stop network test Increasing number of send points by installing multiple module with the same network number Multiple CPU system support Remote I O system Redundant system support Network diagnostics line monitor qs OII KIXI KIXI XI OIX O Available x Not available Appendix 7 1 Appendix 5 Restrictions on Using MELSECNET H Module with Safety CPU Module Data cannot be written to the safety CPU module from the CPU module on another station App 33 Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES MELSEC LES eries Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU Module 1 Network parameters w
33. When allo is ON ON if there is error S Error information ON Error common common information information OFF No error individual Error individual information When SMO is ON ON if there is error SM16 S E information ON Error individual individual information Eror information SM50 Error reset OFF ON Error reset Conducts error reset operation U ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value Battery OFF N SM51 Suey lone pele e Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to S Error latch ON Battery low normal thereafter e Synchronous with BAT LED OFF Normal Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently SM52 Battery S E e ii ON Battery low when battery voltage returns to normal Error OFF AC DOWN not Tume ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC SM53 AG DOWN deractad ower supply module S Error detection ON AC DOWN P PEY Par detected Reset when the power supply is switched OFF then ON OFF Normal ON when operator arene Generated SM56 Operation error e Remains ON if the condition is restored to S Error ON Operation error normal thereafter e Turns ON if the I O module differs from the I O module OFF Normal status registered at power on SM61 S E 6 verify error ON Error e Remains ON if the condition is restored to Etor normal thereafter A iat OFF Not detected S Instructi SM62 Maaa on pies Goes ON if even one ann
34. a Use of the same timer A given timer cannot be designated by OUT T more than once in a single scan This designation results in measurement since the timer current value is updated at execution of each OUT Ti instruction OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT END Ti Tis Ti END Ti Tis Sequence program gt Current value i is updated CPU Module Processing Time 1 scan Diagram 9 23 When the same timer is used b When set value is 0 If the timer set value is 0 the contact turns ON when the OUT T instruction is executed Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module c When the set value is 1 When the timer limit setting value is greater than the scan time value the count value of the timer becomes 1 at execution of the END instruction in a scan where the count value reaches to the timer limit setting value When the coil of the timer turns on in the scan next to the one where the count value becomes 1 the current timer value becomes 1 In this case the timer times up in the step and the contact turns on If the contact of the timer setting value 1 turns on in a short time change the timer with small timer limit setting value and set a greater value to the contact Appendices Scan time X0 K1 a 1 C TO gt END END END END END END a END l Program t H i s Index Measurement of timer Count with END instruction Current value of timer xo
35. or D1424 80 79 to 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 station own station 4 SD1425 96 95 to 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Communicati SD1426 112 111 to 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 on error of SD1427 to 120 119 118117116 115 114 1113 safety station j a on CC Link 1 to 120 in the table indicate stanon Numbers IE Field Fixed to 0 2 Network 3 The communication status with each safety station is stored e SD1440 Station number 0 to SD1560 Station number 120 e For reserved stations unused stations standard stations or own station 0 is stored Safety Stores the ey soni 0 Safety refresh communication SD1440 communicatio communication cs init 10 to 15 Safety initial communication S Status 2 to n status of status with AR qs 30 Communication error or interlocked change SD1560 each safety each safety a f station station 8400 Safety communication target station detection error 8420 8421 8422 8423 8424 8425 Safety monitoring timeout error 8430 8431 8432 Safety station reception data error 8440 Safety connection setting error Appendix 2 Special Register List App 23 APPENDICES MELSEC LES eres TableApp 19 Special register Set by Corresponding Numbe
36. time in 1 ms units Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 TableApp 14 Special register Explanation The current scan time is stored into SD520 and SD521 Measurement is made in 100 ys units SD520 Stores the value of ms Storage range 0 to 6553 SD521 Stores the value of ws Storage range 0 to 900 Example When the current scan time is 23 6ms the following Set by When set S Every END time Current scan values are stored D521 time in 100 us SD520 23 units SD521 600 The accuracy of processing time of scantime is 0 1ms Minimum scan i Stores the minimum value of the scan time into SD524 and SD524 time in 1 ms 3 i oa SD525 Measurement is made in 100 ys units Minimum units seaniiime Nini SD524 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 6553 S Every END Ge SaN SD525 Stores the s place Storage range 0 to 900 SD525 time in 100 ys ae acd its The accuracy of processing time of scantime is 0 1ms units Maximum scan g i F Stores the maximum value of the scan time into SD526 and SD526 time in 1 ms i i R SD527 Measurement is made in 100 us units Maximum units ti SD526 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 6553 S Every END scatunins Maximum scan SD527 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 SD527 time in 100 us i its The accuracy of processing time of scantime is 0 1ms u
37. x Communication using the Web function x CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication O Router relay communication Router relay function O Existence check of external device O Communication using the pairing open method O Remote password check O Simultaneous broadcast O Communication with TCP IP O MELSOFT products using 3 UDP IP O dedicated connections Hardware test O Self loopback test O Communication error storage O Ethernet diagnostics function using GX Developer O O Available x Not available 1 Available only for the Ethernet module with a serial number first five digits of 07082 or later 2 Data cannot be written to the safety CPU module from the CPU module on another station lt Appendix 7 1 Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU App 35 Module APPENDICES 3 MC protocol which can be used in the safety CPU module EL SEC LM eres TableApp 25 and TableApp 26 list the data communication functions using the MC protocol and their availability in the safety CPU module a 4E frame and QnA compatible 3E frame TableApp 25 List of MC protocol functions 4E frame and QnA compatible 3E frame and their availability in the safety CPU module i Command IEE Function Type Availability Subcommand Bit 0401 00 1 Batch read
38. 00 e eee eee 8 2 PLC parameters 0 0 0 000055 8 2 Precautions Design Precautions A 1 A 2 Disposal Precautions A 7 Installation Precautions A 3 Startup and Maintenance precautions A 5 Wiring Precautions A 3 A 5 Procedure Procedure for bootrun 5 10 Write procedure 2205 5 12 Processing method 2000 eeu 9 21 Processing speed 0 0 cee eee 2 1 Program capacity 0 0 00 e eee eee 2 1 Program language 00 eee eee eee 2 1 Program memory ie reene rer d Er eee eee 5 3 Purpose of I O assignment a nn nananana 4 5 R Recording eneas Ert IEA eyed oe Stee ead 6 35 Resetting Resetting the counter 5 9 26 RUN status Soini gs euni e pa e e eee 3 9 RUN PAUSE contact 000 2 2 S Safety settings 0 0 0 eee 8 9 SB Link special relay 0005 9 17 Scan time Le ee ee 3 5 SD Special register 0000 9 33 Self diagnostics 0 2 0 0 00 eee eee 6 28 Sequence Program 0 e eee eee 3 1 Serial NO 6 ee ee be eee 1 10 SM Special relay 00 000 e nee 9 32 Special register SD 00000 9 33 Special register SD 2 2 2 Special Register List App 7 Special relay SM anana 0 0 00 e eee eee 9 32 Special relay SM
39. 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 4 5 3 3 6 2 4 6 7 6 7 2 8 2 9 2 1 9 2 6 9 2 7 9 2 11 9 2 12 10 1 10 1 2 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 8 Appendix 9 Addition Section 7 2 May 2012 SH NA 080627ENG I Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 4 5 3 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 9 Japanese Manual Version SH 080608 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC QS Series of Safety Programmable Controllers Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the QS series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COC OOOO OOOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO SOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOH OOOOOOO OOOO OOOO OOOES A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT secccc000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 8 REVISIONS eseessecseesossecsecso
40. 1000 lt High speed Section 9 2 8 Section 6 12 1 RUN PAUSE contact 10011 Section 8 1 2 Section 6 12 2 Remote reset 1002 Section 8 1 2 x Section 6 10 E Output mode at STOP to RUN 1003 Section 8 1 2 Section 4 2 1 Points occupied by empty slot 1007 Section 8 1 2 Section 8 1 4 Device points 2000 Section 9 1 Section 9 2 i Section 3 2 WDT watchdog timer setting 3000 Section 8 1 3 To the next page Appendix 3 Parameter Number List App 25 APPENDICES TableApp 18 Parameter number list continued MELSEC LES erie Item Parameter No Reference f Section 6 9 Constant scanning 3003 Section 8 1 3 CC Link IE Nomor type 5000 Controller Starting I O No Network No Network 5NMOx Station No et aaa Mode Section 8 2 2 setting Refresh parameters 5NM14 Station No 5NM0Ou Valid module during other station access Routing parameters 5003 Continuous RUN in test mode 6000 Section 6 5 Operation mode at the time of a remote station error Section 8 1 8 Network type 9000 Starting I O No Network No Station No ae e Operational settings f Ethernet setting Section 8 2 3 Initial settings 9NM14 Open settings 9NM2 Router relay parameter 9NM3x Routing parameters ONM4u Station No lt gt IP information 9NM5u Network type A080 Starting I O No Network No Total stations ANMO CC
41. 1E frame and their availability in the safety CPU module i Command im e Function Type Availability Subcommand Bit 00 Batch read 2 Word 01H O Bit 024 se Batch write Word 03H x Bit 044 x Device memory Test Random write Word 05 H x Bit 064 x Monitor data registration Word 074 a Bit 084 x Monitor Word 094 x O Available x Not available 1 Since the function is supported on the Ethernet module side no error occurs as long as the specified device has no errors Remark BODES ERE EEE For details on the MC protocol refer to the following manuals L7 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual L7 Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic L gt Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application eeeeeeevneeeeeoeeeaoeeeoeeevneeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeoee ee App 38 Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module Appendix 7 1 List of dedicated instructions 1 Dedicated instructions which can be used in the safety CPU module TableApp 27 lists the dedicated instructions which can be used in the safety CPU module TableApp 27 List of available dedicated instructions Supported network CC Link IE Dedicated Application
42. 2 1 I O numbers of base unit I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSECIEN rcs Example of system configuration Pim So o pol gt ols 23 23 28 i 2 eo Sis EE a eea E mez E KEISSE Sl amp a olo 8 58 4 a J Ore ore 32 oO 5 e e CC Link Safety CC Link Safety Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station Example of I O number assignment Input output X Y XxIYO ESO numbers assigned to the CC Link Safety master modules and CC Link IE Controller Network module X Y5F a lt m X Y100 p y Refresh destination for the first CC Link Safety master module Refresh destination for the second CC Link 1 O numbers which can be assigned to Safety master module remote stations Refresh destination for the There are no restrictions on the link I O LX LY of CC Link assignment order of I O numbers IE Controller Network module specified to the refresh destination of CC Link Safety master modules and CC Link IE Controller Network module X Y17FF 4 Diagram 4 2 Example of I O number assignment for remote stations The following areas can be set to Empty e Area between the first and the second CC Link Safety master module refreshes e Area between the second CC Link Safety master module refresh and the CC Link IE Controller Network module refresh 4 3 4 2 Concept of I O Number Assignment 4 2 2 I
43. 2 5 Edge relay V eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesescsesesecesececececoceseccoocococcocososososososessossesesesesecececeososososs 9 14 9 2 6 Link relay B sseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeecsoscscsceseoececececeseccoececoocococososososoosssossssesesesesesececeesesese 9 15 9 2 7 Link special relay SB 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 m 17 9 2 8 Timer T COCO OOOOH COO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOS OOOO OOO OO OOOEE 9 18 9 2 9 Counter C COCO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOS OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOOOH OOCOOOOOES 9 m 24 9 2 1 0 Data register DD he 9 a 28 9 2 1 1 Link register W COCO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOO ODEO OO OOO OOO OOOOOOOOO OOO OOOE 9 29 9 2 12 Link special register SW COCO OO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOS OOO OOOOOOOOOO 9 31 9 3 Internal System Devices COO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOS OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOOOOOOOOO OOO OOOOOOS 9 32 A 12 9 3 1 Special relay SM eeeeeecccccccccoceccecccccccecccccoccocococcoocccecccocccocceccococcoococccecceccccccceccoo 9 32 9 3 2 Special register SD COOL OOOO O OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOS OOO OOOOHOOOO OOO OOOE 9 33 9 4 Nesting N COCO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO O
44. 2 Cancel the error 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC ES erie 6 8 Recording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error history function 1 What the operation error history function is The operation error history function records the operations that have been executed to the CPU module from the outside and the self diagnostics errors that have occurred in the CPU module in the past The objective of this function is to make troubleshooting easier 2 Data stored in the operation error history area 3 aw The CPU module stores the operations that have been executed to the CPU module from the outside and the self diagnostics errors in the operation error history area CPU module T PYF Operation error history es 5 a oo ce occurred 4101 0PERATION ERROR 23 Record self iS i diagnostics 5001 WDT ERROR Record error Operation aera OP161 SWITCH TO STOP is y Siw error occurred REMOTERY S E o 2 C Z g GX Developer g 3 Diagram 6 13 Recording the operation error history to the CPU module z a Operations executed to the CPU module from the outside E The following are stored as operations executed to the CPU module from the 2E outside e Online operations from GX Developer e Operations with the CPU module RUN STOP RESET e Input power supply ON OFF Table6 13 shows the operations stored in the operation error history g i 558 oEc2 6 8 R
45. 46 Clearing Retentive timer clear 9 20 Clock function 0 2000055 6 45 Concept of I O assignment 4 6 Constant scan 0000 eee 2 1 6 39 Constant scanning 0 00 eee eee 6 18 Continuation error 22055 6 28 Control method 22000000 2 1 Counter C euet a a e eee 9 24 Count processing s a asuaan 9 24 Resetting the counter 9 26 Counter C Ar peace a atk doled eA N a 2 2 CPU module Performance specifications 2 1 D Data register Djs dreo i araeo oreta 9 28 Data register D nananana 2 2 Data that can be stored into memories 5 2 Decimal constant K 200 eae 9 35 Device Annunciator F 2 22000000e 2 2 Counter C rare emie rea i a eee 2 2 Data register D nonna nananana 2 2 Edge relay V i eenen a e a 2 2 Internal relay M onanan 2 2 Link register W 200055 2 2 Link relay B nonna nn 2 2 Link special register SW 2 2 Link special relay SB 2 2 Special register SD 2 2 Special relay SM 2 2 2 Index 1 TimeriI senas tetate dh hee ater lata cata See 2 2 Device liSt ods pee das Ma TE LET 9 1 Device setting 2 0 cee ee ee 8 5 Drive iNOS wes ot feet EEEE En de nane ee hate 5 2 DULY fess Meek pets Ab eae bean ak bale ee ed 9 27
46. 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 4 5 1 2 Program memory D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSECIEN rcs c Checking the memory capacity after formatting To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the Free space volume button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field 1 Select target memory Read from PLC Connecting interface juss AAN PLC module PLC Connection Station No Host PLC type QS001 Execute Param Prog Cancel all selections Close E Pi 8 Program MAIN 06 04 25 16 23 54 21 Peniti Parameter Transfer setup PLC Network 06 04 25 16 23 50 Device memory See Device data Remote operation lt Clear PLC memory Format PLC memory Pl A Refresh view Arrange PLC memory Create title Total free space volume 2 Click e 3 Memory capacity is displayed Diagram 5 3 Memory capacity checking procedure 127988 Bytes 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 2 Program memory MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSEC LES erie 4 Write to program memory When writing data to program memory display the writing to PLC screen with GX Developer Online Write to PLC Select Program memory Device memory as the
47. 7 4 Communication with Ethernet Module 0coooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 7 5 Communication using intelligent function module dedicated instructions sesseeseceeseescescesecsecsecees 7 3 CHAPTER8 PARAMETERS 8 1to8 15 8 1 PLC Parameters coooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 2 8 2 Network Parameters e eeeccccccocooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 10 8 3 Remote Password COC OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOS OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOO OS OOOO OOO OOO OOOCOOE 8 15 CHAPTERS DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 1to9 35 9 1 Device Ligte seeeeesessesseesecsescescecoosooseoccecooccosceeccecoocsoseeccecooseoscecoecsoseeseesoecoosoeseessessoseoss 9 1 9 2 Internal User Devices seesessesseeseseeseeceeccosooscecsecooccoscecsecoosooseecoeccosoessecoocsosceessesoesosossese 9 2 9 2 1 Input X sseseeeeeeeeceseeeccccccecsososcccseseseseseccsesescocccccccocococcosoososesesesecesesesesesescocoeeeese 9 5 9 2 2 Output Y eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseccsesesesesesececesesececececcococososoccosscoossscosseseseseseseseceococosesessssse9 _ 7 9 2 3 Internal relay M eseseeeeeeeeseesesesesesesecececoceseceoeceooococosocoocooooseseseseseseseseceoeceosesesessee9 B 9 2 4 Annunciator F seeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseseseseoececececesesesececoccococosocooosososcseseseseseseseseceoeoeososeee9 O 9
48. Base Set the model name of the used model main base unit User memo Not 16 characters No setting name used for the CPU module Set the model name of the Power power supply module mounted model on the main base unit User 16 characters No setting Sianel name 04014 memo Not used for the CPU Section 4 4 selling module i Set the extension cable model Extension z ble name User memo Not used for 16 characters No setting the CPU module Slots a the number of slots of the 4 No setting main base unit Switch setting 04074 Unusable Unusable 8 7 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 PARAMETERS 7 X Y assignment AG Series Check the data set on the I O assignment tab Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting Acknowledge XY Assignment Type Module type 1 0 Assign Points Model name Duplication In the 1 0 assignment setting It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the Close unsetting on the way Diagram 8 7 X Y assignment Table8 7 X Y assignment list Item Parameter No Description Setting range The data set in the I O y assignment tab Ethernet CC IE t poe Gass Z ascinmen MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting can be checked Default value Reference 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 8 Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intellige
49. CPU z TableApp 15 Special register g Set b Cc di Number Name Meaning Explanation When mn asics os e Stores the safety CPU operation mode b15 to b2 b1b0 Safety CPU aey Safety CPU Empty S Status 3 SD560 operation operation mode l 00 SAFETY MODE change 2 mode 01 TEST MODE 8 10 SAFETY MODE i Wait for restart E QS 5 Stores the TEST MODE continuous RUN time Measured in 8 SD561 TEST MODE TEST MODE Seconds 2 E continuous RUN time in TEST MODE Start measurement when STOP amp OF continuous i ee S Every END RUN time RUN time RUN Time when operation is STOP is not included SD562 seconds e Stores the measurement valve with the range of 1 to 2147483647 2 a EO 6 Memory 2 2 FEN ial regi 8 8 TableApp 16 Special register EE Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by Corresponding When set CPU Indicates the type of built in memory b15 to b8 b7 to b4b3 to b0 SD620 Memory type Memory type Q A D S Initial 2 i 4 Fixed at 8 Standard ROM 3 FLASH ROM Qs 5 lt Drive 4 SD623 ROM Drive 4 capacity Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1K byte units S Initial capacity Index Appendix 2 Special Register List App 19 APPENDICES 7 CC Link Safety TableApp 17 Special register AG Qs ie Corresponding Set b Numb
50. Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 14 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN 6 55 6 14 1 Online change in ladder mode 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie d Instructions do not operate normally at online change When online change is performed the following instructions do not operate normally e Trailing edge instruction e Leading edge instruction 1 Trailing edge instruction The trailing edge instruction is executed when the instruction is in a writing range even the execution condition ON OFF is not established at the completion of online change Completion of online change X100 status X100 OFF gt OFF Mo X100 ON ON Mo X100 ON OFF Mo HH PLF MO H END 0 AEND O A END O ON Trailing edge instruction is executed even the execution condition is OFF OFF bs OF FS E ON T 1 OFF OFF ON OoFR _ gt _ _ ON ee EE e l d OFF Diagram 6 27 Trailing edge instruction operation The corresponding instructions are LDF ANDF ORF MEF PLF 6 56 6 14 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN 6 14 1 Online change in ladder mode FUNCTIONS MELEGEN res 2 Leading edge instruction The leading edge instruction is not executed when the instruction is in a writing range even the execution condition OFF ON is established at the completion of online Overview Completion
51. Controller ae SD2 Group number Network or MELSECNET H module OF e Indicates the station number of mounted CC Link IE Controller SD258 Stati b Purser Network or MELSECNET H module v f poi 5 SD290 Number EOR Stores the number of points currently set for X devices 2S assigned for X ga Number of points 2 T SD291 Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices 2 9 assigned for Y g 3 Number of points F 3s D292 Stores the number of points currently set for M devices 8 assigned for M ee Number of poi D294 am eres e Stores the number of points currently set for B devices assigned for B Number of poi D295 Meer ST pome Stores the number of points currently set for F devices assigned for F as Number of points SD296 i Device assigned for SB assignment Number of points SD297 Same as the 5 Stores the number of points currently set for V devices S Initial assigned for V parameter SD299 setting Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices Appendices Number of points A Stores the number of points currently set for T devices assigned for T Number of poi SD300 as Seer Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices assigned for ST Number of poi SD301 me Sr OT PONES Stores the number of points currently set for C devices assigned for C Numb i SD302 as SRR Stores the number of points cu
52. Definition of Clock Function The clock function reads the internal clock data of the CPU module to use it for time management The clock data is used by the CPU module system to perform time management e g storage of date into the operation error history Overview 2 Clock operation at power OFF and momentary power failure Clock operation is continued by the internal battery of the CPU module during power OFF of the programmable controller or when a power failure longer than the permissible momentary power failure time occurs Performance Specification 3 Clock Data Clock data is used in the CPU module and includes the data indicated in Table6 16 Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions Table6 16 Clock data details Data Name Contents Year Four digits in AD Countable from 1980 to 2079 Month 1 to 12 E Day 1 to 31 Automatic leap year calculation 3 Hour 0 to 23 24 hours z Minute 0 to 59 6 Second 0 to 59 0 Sunday 1 Monday E 2 Tuesday Z Day of the week 3 Wednesday 5 a 4 Thursday 3 5 Friday 5g 6 Saturday a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 11 Clock Function 6 45 6 FUNCTIONS M LS aG lN 4 Changing and reading the clock data a Changing clock data The clock data can be changed by either GX Developer or the special relay and special registers 1 Changing data using
53. Device monitor 3 3ms Online change 11 3ms D amp m a is B a 2 S 3 iS Pls 8 Time Operation error history display 6 1ms 1 Time taken to read an 8K step program from the program memory 2 Time taken when 32 points have been set in registration monitor 3 Time taken when a 100 step ladder is added 4 Time taken to update the display specifying AIl log Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module e Communication with Ethernet module For details of the time required for communication with the Ethernet module refer to the following manual Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic Appendices Index 10 1 Scan Time 1 0 4 10 1 2 Time required for each processing included in scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME M aL 26 eS 5 Module refresh time Module refresh time is the total time for the link refresh of CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H and the auto refresh of CC Link Safety set in the network parameters a CC Link IE Field Network refresh time This is the time required to refresh data between the link devices of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions and the devices of the CPU module The CC Link IE Field Network refresh time Tmnet will be calculated with the following formula Tmnet
54. GX Developer Display the Set time screen by selecting Online Set clock in GX Developer and change the clock data of the CPU module Set time Connection target information Connection interface USB lt gt PLC module Target PLC Station no Host PLCtype 05001 Clock setup YY MMDD Hr Min Sec Day z006 o3 31 fio 26 foo Friday Diagram 6 23 Clock data write from GX Developer POINT When the CPU module clock data is changed using GX Developer the CPU module records OP210 ADJUST SYSTEM CLOCK in the operation error history 2 Changing data using special relay and special registers The clock data can be written using the special relay SM210 and special registers SD210 to SD213 For details on the special relay refer to Appendix 1 For details on the special registers refer to Appendix 2 b Reading clock data The clock data can be read using the special relay SM213 and special registers SD210 to 213 For details on the special relay refer to Appendix 1 for details on the special registers refer to Appendix 2 6 46 6 11 Clock Function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 5 Precautions a Initial clock data setting The clock data is not factory set The clock data is used by the CPU module system for operation error history etc When using the CPU module for the first time be sure to set the precise time Overview b Clock data when battery is low The CP
55. In order to use link relays in the network system a network parameter setting is required Link relays in the range where network parameters have not been set not used in each network can be used as internal relays x POINT To use the link device in each module with the number of device points for link relays in the CPU module default 2048 points or more change the number of device points for link relays on the Device setting tab of PLC parameter For the network parameters refer to the manual L gt The manual for each network module 9 16 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 6 Link relay B Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em 9 2 7 Link special relay SB 1 Definition Link special relay is a relay used to indicate the communication status and error detection of the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module and MELSECNET H module ON OFF of the link special relays are controlled by various causes that occur during data link By monitoring the link special relays the communication status error status and others of data link can be grasped 2 Number of link special relay points The number of link special relay points is as described in Table9 3 Table9 3 Number of link special relay points of each CPU module CPU module Number of link special relay points 1536 points SBO to 5FF The number of devic
56. Link IE Field Station No Network setting Mode secon ee Refresh parameters ANM 11 Network Configuration Setting ANM2 Network Operation Setting ANM3x Safety communication setting 6403 App 26 Appendix 3 Parameter Number List APPENDICES MELEGEN res TableApp 18 Parameter number list continued Item Parameter No Reference Number of CC Link C000 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW Starting I O No Operational settings Type CC Link Station No setting Master Station Data Link Type Mode setting Transmission settings Safety refresh monitoring time CNM2u Safety data monitoring time Link ID All connect count Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Scan mode setting Station information setting Device Explanation CNM1 CPU Module Processing Time Section 8 2 3 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index Appendix 3 Parameter Number List App 27 APPENDICES MELSEC LES rcs Appendix 4 Restrictions on Using CC Link IE Controller Network Module with Safety CPU Module 1 Network parameters which can be set in the safety CPU module TableApp 19 lists the network parameters for CC Link IE Controller Network and their setting availability with GX Developer when CC L
57. M2500 X10 X11 21 AF AF Mov K2 D252 Re initial Connection Connection instruction 1 open 2 open POS SSS SSS a a SSS SS SSS SSS SSS SSS Mi completion completion i lt Communication data code gt 1 signal signal 1 f SET D255 1 EEN PIRENEA ITEE Operation setting i lt TCP existence confirmation setting gt I I elit i LRST D255 4 Ji i Operation setting Rr a eg ne ge ye N on ie lt Send frame setting gt I I I F I SET D255 5 a ec rae A E EEEE Operation setting lt Enable Write at RUN time setting changeable gt SET D255 6 Operation setting lt Initial timing setting gt I f I i SET D2555 J I Operation setting ZP UINI UO D250 M250 UINI instruction completion device LRST M260 Initial completion status M250 M251 lt Normal completion processing gt 108 INCP D260 J UINI UINI instruction Normal instruction abnormal completion completion completion device processing device M251 lt Abnormal completisn processing i INCP D261 UINI instruction Abnormal abnormal completion completion device processing RST M2500 Re initial instruction X19 B 139 SET M260 Initial normal Initial completion signal PA status Fig App 5 Program example using I O signals 1 The safety CPU module cannot read the current operation setting Therefore all operation setting items need to be specified When specifying these items do not change the current setting for the ite
58. MELCO s authorized representative for examination and if found defective for repair or replacement The costs of removal shipment to and from MELCO s designated examination point and reinstallation of repaired or replaced Products shall be at Customer s expense 4 If Customer requests and MELCO agrees to effect repairs onsite at any domestic or overseas location the Customer will pay for the costs of sending repair personnel and shipping parts MELCO is not responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves repairs or replacing of the Products d Repairs of Products located outside of Japan are accepted by MELCO s local authorized service facility centers FA Centers Terms and conditions on which each FA Center offers repair services for Products that are out of warranty or not covered by MELCO s limited warranty may vary e Subject to availability of spare parts MELCO will offer Product repair services for 7 years after each Product model or line is discontinued at MELCO s or its FA Centers rates and charges and standard terms in effect at the time of repair MELCO usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of seven 7 years after production is discontinued f MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO s Technical Bulletins Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontin
59. Numeric Expressions for CPU module Registers H EJPOINT h To each bit of each register a 2 value is assigned Sii Note that the most significant bit is used for distinction of sign positive or negative 1 When most significant bit is 0 Positive 2 When most significant bit is 1 Negative A 5 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 3 16 3 7 1 BIN Binary Code 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES res 3 7 2 HEX Hexadecimal 1 Hexadecimal notation In hexadecimal notation 4 binary bits are expressed in 1 digit If 4 binary bits are used in binary notation 16 different values from O to 15 can be represented Since hexadecimal notation represents 0 to 15 in 1 digit letters AH to FH are used to represent the numbers 10 to 15 Then a carry occurs after FH Table3 5 shows the numeric expressions of BIN HEX and DEC decimal Table3 5 Comparison of BIN HEX and DEC Numeric Expressions DEC Decimal HEX Hexadecimal BIN Binary 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 10 3 3 11 9 9 1001 10 A 1010 11 B 1011 12 C 1100 13 D 1101 14 E 1110 15 F 1111 n Carry 16 10 1 0000 17 11 1 0001 47 2F 10 1111 2 Hexadecimal numeric expression CPU module registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits For 16 bits 0 to FFFFH can be specified in hexadecimal POINT The CPU module regards data stored in HEX as BIN For example if FFFFH is stored into a register in H
60. O Assignment by GX Developer This section describes the I O assignment using GX Developer 4 3 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer Perform I O assignment setting by GX Developer in the following cases 1 Preventing I O numbers from changing when converting modules You can avoid the change in the intelligent function module is removed due to a malfunction 2 Changing the I O numbers to those used in the program When the designed program s I O numbers are different from the actual system I O numbers each module s I O number of base units can be set to program l O number 4 POINT 1 The I O assignment setting becomes valid when the programmable controller is powered OFF and then ON or the CPU module is reset 2 Ifan intelligent function module breaks down without making I O assignment settings using GX Developer it may lead to malfunction of the module changing I O numbers of the modules after the broken one Therefore it is recommended to make I O assignment setting using GX Developer 4 3 I O Assignment by GX Developer 4 3 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT M aL 26 Qs ie 4 3 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer In I O assignment the Type module type Points I O points and Start XY starting I O number can be set for each slot of the base units For example to change the number of occupied I O points of the designated slot only
61. O O x lO x O O JO O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module App 49 APPENDICES ELS AG Qs em 2 When the first five digits of the serial No of the CPU module is 13042 or later a Access range x CClEcont ascpu CC Link Ethernet or CCIETie ao Safety ao NeT Safety AO AO AO l GXD1 AO f gt 4 Cannot be connected QSCPU CC Link Ethernet CCIEfie 3 A10 Safety A10 Safety GOT Sag A10 A10 A0 Cannot be connected Can be connected up to A a eS CG Link Safety esenee i 7 layers in the system GXD1 GXD1 O Bi AN A10 A10 i i C CC Link IE Field Network I ascpu CC Link Qcpu acpu CC Link Ai Safety A2 B2 A2 l A1 Bus ICClEcont j i GOT connection QCPU QCPU CCIEfie Ethernet C24 CC Link or f i A11 A11 B11 A11
62. Precautions CAUTION Use a safety programmable controller in the environment that meets the general specifications described in this manual Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Incorrect loading of the module can cause a failure or drop Secure the module to the base unit with screws Tighten the screw in the specified torque range If the screws are too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so could result in damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure Wiring Precautions WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external supply power used by the system before wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When energizing or operating the module after insta
63. REQ O O O another station Reads clock data from the CPU module on RTMRD O O x another station For communications with a programmable controller CPU RIRD Reads data from devices of the CPU module on O on another station CC Link another station i i dedicated instruction O Available x Not available 41 The REQ instruction only reads and writes clock data If other operations are requested an OPERATION ERROR error code 4001 occurs Remark RXR eee Eee eee eee eee eee For details on each dedicated instruction refer to the following manuals Manuals of each network module eeeeeoeeeeoeaoeseeoeeeeeeeevoeeeeeceeeeeoeeeeeeeeeoeeeoeeeoeeoeeoe ee App 40 Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC ES erie Appendix 7 2 Programming using dedicated instructions Since the safety CPU module does not support the intelligent function module device U Device Explanation Gi and the FROM TO instructions data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module cannot be used in the sequence program of the safety CPU module To use data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module in the sequence program of the safety CPU module use I O signals which correspond to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module In order to use dedicated instructions listed in TableApp 29 replace the p
64. RESET switch upon completion of the reset processing 2 Remote processing in GX Developer can be completed without setting Remote reset to Allow in the PLC system setting screen of PLC parameter However the reset processing is not performed to the CPU module accordingly the CPU module will not be reset When the CPU module status does not change with Remote reset in GX Developer check if the Remote reset on the PLC system setting screen is set to Allow 6 52 6 12 Remote Operation 6 12 2 Remote RESET 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LOS cries 6 12 3 Relationship of remote operation and CPU s RUN STOP status 1 Relationship of the Remote Operation and CPU module Switch The CPU module operation status is as shown in Table6 18 with the combination of remote operations to RUN STOP switch Overview Table6 18 Relation between RUN STOP status and remote operation Remote operation Performance Specification RUN STOP status Cannot RUN RUN STOP s operate 2 STOP STOP STOP RESET 3 1 When performing the operation with RUN contact RUN PAUSE contact must be set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 2 RESET can be performed if the CPU module changed to the STOP status by a remote operation 3 This includes a situation where the CPU module is stopped due to error Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 2 Remote Operations from the Same GX Devel
65. Safety Programmable Con troller 7 eeeeeeeeoeaoeoeceoeeeeeoeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee 3 3 6 Data Clear Processing 3 12 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs DEC Decimal 0 1 2 3 MELSEC LES erie Numeric and alphabetic data are expressed by 0 OFF and 1 ON numerals in the CPU module This expression form is called binary code BIN The hexadecimal HEX expression form in which BIN data are expressed in 4 bit units and the BCD binary coded decimal expression form are applicable to the CPU module Table3 3 shows the numeric expressions of BIN HEX BCD and DEC decimal Table3 3 BIN HEX BCD and Decimal Numeric Expressions HEX Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 nmo oO DPO ak ak a o 2F 7FFE 7FFF 8000 8001 FFFE FFFF 0111 0111 1000 1000 1111 1111 BIN Binary 1 1 10 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 10 11 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 1111 1110 1111 0000 0001 1110 1111 BCD Binary Coded Decimal A i i i A M ee aM 100 1000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0 1 10 11 1001 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 0111 0000 0001 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION M aL 26 SS 1 Numeric value input from outside to CPU
66. Safety master Safety SD1206 48 47 to 34 33 module 2 1 Safety station sp1207 64 63 to 50 49 communication error 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The status of communication with each safety remote station is stored D1208 Station number 1 to SD1271 Station number 64 0 fixed in the case of standard remote station reserved station x specified or without connection g 0 At normal communication 10 At initial 20 During internal information access Safety station 30 Link error ae The status of Sas D1208 communication ne 8300 The safety communications Safety remote station communication S Status to status CC Link with safet detection error change D1271 Safety master ae y 8310 The safety communications Product information 9 station is stored module 2 mismatch 8320 The safety communications Initial monitor timeout 8321 The safety communications Safety monitor timeout 8322 The safety communications Error monitor timeout 8330 The safety communications Command error 8331 The safety communications Data split number error 8332 The safety communications Link ID error 8333 The safety communications Running number error 8334 The safety communications Received data error Appendix 2 Special Register List App 21 APPENDICES TableApp 17 Special register AG Qs em Corresponding
67. Send data setting MoV D5678 D302 Send data setting mov K8901 D303 Send data setting ZP BUFSND UO K1 D3000 D300 M300 Send data BUFSND length instruction setting completion number of device words M300 M301 r 45 l ae Normal completion processing BUFSND BUFSND B instruction instruction completion abnormal device completion device M301 J m Abnormal completion processing BUFSND L l instruction abnormal completion device Fig App 4 Program example using I O signals Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module App 45 Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES MELSEGCIEN rics 5 UINI instruction Fig App 5 shows a program example where buffer memory addresses are replaced with I O signals in the program for reinitialize the Ethernet module 1 TableApp 34 Buffer memory address I O signal correspondence Buffer memory address i OET EN in hexadecimal decimal 5000 20480 Open completion signal X10 Connection 1 open completion When the I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F lt lt lt Re initial processing of connection No 1 gt gt gt M6500 o SET M2500 Re initial Re initial instruction instruction lt Specifying the change of operation setting gt
68. Structure A program file consists of a file header execution program and allocate memory for online Overview change Program file structure 34 steps File header a Execution program Area is secured in file size units I Section 5 3 4 Performance Specification for online program change 500 steps default Allocate memory Diagram 5 9 Program file structure 1 Structure details Bee The capacity of the program stored in the program memory of the CPU module is the 855 total of the above three areas So N O W a File header This area stores the file name size creation date etc The file header size ranges from 26 to 34 steps 102 to 134 bytes depending on the device setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Default 34 steps 1 O Nunber Assignment b Execution program This area stores the created program ol c Allocate memory for online change This area is used when online change that increases the number of steps is performed by GX Developer 1 Default number of allocate memory for online change The default setting is 500 steps 2000 bytes 2 Changing the number of allocate memory for online change The number of allocate memory for online change can be changed by GX Developer by choosing Online Write to PLC lt Program gt tab 2 3 3 fe o 8 gt Fo D 2 ae o x n 2 T ke oO o k O E v z Functions Communic
69. USER ERR D Bat PLC memory initialization completed The ALIVE LED on the front of the CPU module lights up and ERR LED flashes For a battery error the BAT LED lights up ON ON ALIVE fes RUN L USER ERR BAT Flashing End Figure 6 10 PLC memory initialization procedure continued 5 Precautions a PLC memory initialization when the CPU module error occurs If the PLC memory is initialized when the errors like INTERNAL CPU COMMUNICATION ERROR error code 8070 to 8074 occur the communication error may occur at the time of writing from the GX Developer to the CPU module Initialize the PLC memory after confirming that the above mentioned error does not occur For how to deal with INTERNAL CPU COMMUNICATION ERROR error code 8070 to 8074 refer to the error code list described in the QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection b Communication with GX Developer during PLC memory initialization Online operation from GX Developer to the CPU module cannot be executed during the PLC memory initialization Execute online operation from GX Developer after the PLC memory initialization is completed 6 4 PLC memory initialization 6 FUNCTIONS MELSECIEN res 6 5 Setting to prevent continuous RUN in TEST MODE 1 What the setting to prevent continuous RUN in TEST MODE is The setting to prevent continuous RUN i
70. W O O x x x Network gt CPU refresh SB sw o o O x z CPU gt MELSECNET B W O O x x x H refresh 5 MELSECNET SB SW O o x z F H MELSECNET H gt CPU B W 8 O x x x refresh SB SW O O O F O The function operates x The function does not operate This combination does not exist 6 14 1 Indicates the stop error due to moderate errors or major errors For details on moderate errors and major errors refer to the following manual L gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Selecting Case of CPU STOP setting for the operation setting leads to the following operations When Clears compulsorily is selected at Case of CPU STOP setting OFF output When Clears compulsorily is not selected at Case of CPU STOP setting RY status output 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 4 Operation of each function in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 2 Safety mode wait for restart Safety mode Durin i Durin i STOP Stop error awitching Bat STOP Stoperror ewitehing pe gs status 4 from STOP a status 4 from STOP z 8 to RUN processing to RUN processing 8 x x O x x x x ao O x O O x x x OFF output OFF output O x 7 Oo O x 2 O x O O x FE Da g
71. Word 0401 00 0 O l Bit 1401 00 1 x Batch write Word 1401 00 0 x Random read Word 0403 00 0 O Device memory Bit 1402 00 1 x Test Random write Word 1402 00 0 x Monitor data registration Word 0801 00 0 x Monitor Word 0802 0000 x 1 2 Multiple block batch read Word 0406 00 0 O Multiple block batch write Word 1406 00 0 x Batch read 0613 0000 o Buffer memory Batch write 1613 0000 o Intelligent function Batch read 0601 0000 O module Batch write 1601 0000 x Remote RUN 1001 0000 x Remote STOP 1002 0000 x Programmable Remote PAUSE 1003 0000 x controller CPU Remote latch clear 1005 0000 x Remote RESET 1006 0000 x CPU model name read 0101 0000 O Memory usage status read 0205 0000 x Drive memory Memory defragmentation 1207 0000 X File information table read Without header statement 0201 0000 X With header statement 0202 0000 x File No usage status 0204 0000 x File information modification Modification of last update 1204 0000 x File name size modification 1204 0001 x Batch modification 1204 0002 x File search 0203 0000 x File File data read 0206 0000 x New registration File name 1202 0000 x registration s n Arbitrary data 1203 0000 x File data write Same data 1203 0001 x File lock registration cancel 0808 000 x File copy 1206 0000 x File delete 1205 0000 x To the next page App 36 Appendix 6 Re
72. Write the remote password using GX Developer Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 16 Remote password 6 63 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES rics 6 17 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer System Monitor After GX Developer is connected to the CPU module the following items can be checked in the system monitor e Installed status e Parameter status e Module s detailed information e Product information Base lt q 3 1 2 Base Module Main base QSO01CPU c SQ Unmo Unmo unti funti ng jng BEE EES 2 Parameter status Mode System monitor Intelli None None None asoorcpu gen Diagnostics 4 S2pt 32pt 16pt 16pt Module s Detailed Information 5 Base Information 6 SNE Product Inf List 7 I Module system error a Module error Oo Module warning Detailed inf of power supply Hi Module change Stop monitor Close 1 2 3 4 Diagram 6 32 System monitor screen Installed status The names and number of modules mounted on the base unit can be checked Not mounted is displayed for slots in which no module is mou
73. be confirmed 7 Product Information List Enables the individual information for mounted CPU modules and intelligent function modules to be confirmed type series model number head I O control PLC serial No function version Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions ic oO E Serial number Function version 2 a o E Product Infor mation List 2 Q Model name i PLC 05 QSO01CPU Intelli QS0761BT12 None v 3 None E n None 2 2 ie T gO o gt 2 a 3 2 E a 2 3 L OSV file creating Diagram 6 33 Product information list i Refer to the following manual for details of the system monitor of GX Developer 5 Be L gt GX Developer Operating Manual EE Parameters 6 17 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer 6 65 6 FUNCTIONS M LS aG lN 6 18 LED Display The LEDs on the front of the CPU module show the CPU module operation status bl QS001CPU ALIVE O O TEST RUNO O USER ERR O OBAT Diagram 6 34 LED on CPU module front Refer to the following manual for details of the LED indications C77 QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 6 18 1 Method to turn off the LED The LED that is on can be turned off by the following operation Except for the reset operation Table6 20 LED turning off method Applicable LED CERR USER BAT Method to Turn LED Off After the cause of error is r
74. be free from any malfunction or failure The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law c MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving power plants trains railway systems airplanes airline operations other transportation systems amusement equipments hospitals medical care dialysis and life support facilities or equipment incineration and fuel devices handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals mining and drilling and other applications where the level of risk to human life health or property are elevated d MELCO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS SALES OR REVENUE FOR INCREASED LABOR OR OVERHEAD COSTS FOR DOWNTIME OR LOSS OF PRODUCTION FOR COST OVERRUNS OR FOR ENVIRONMENTAL OR POLLUTION DAMAGES OR CLEAN UP COSTS WHETHER THE LOSS IS BASED ON CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY VIOLATION OF STATUTE NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE e In the event that any damages which are asserted against MELCO arising out of or relating to the Products or def
75. communication with the master station The safety refresh communication status with each safety station excluding the master station is stored The status of each safety station is stored in SD1420 to SD1427 App 6 ON Communication error OFF Normal or safety communication with master station The safety refresh communication status with S Status change Safety refresh f oe comm uncaldn on CC Link IE the master station is stored SM1421 Field Network not When safety communication with the master status of safety HOR i MO saastarstation set station is not set in parameter or own station is ON Safety refresh the master station this bit turns OFF communication error Safety master A M1700 station interlock OFF Not interlocked When an error is detected and an interlock is ON Interlocked activated this bit turns ON status OFF I O interlock of safety station on CC Link IE Field Safet t Network not i gt es FERIR The safety station interlock status is released SM1720 station interlock released by chanaing this bit from OFF to ON U release request ON I O interlock of y ging safety station on CC Link IE Field Network released Appendix 1 Special Relay List Corresponding CPU as 1 This applies when the serial number first five digits of the CPU module is 13042 or later APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie Appendix 2 Special Register List
76. es 4 Using link registers in a network system In order to use link registers in the network system network parameter settings must be made Link registers that have not been set in network parameters not used in each network can be used as data registers c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a For the network parameters refer to the manual F L gt The manual for each network module 2 eeeeeeeeeveeeeoevseeeeeeeoeseeeeeeeoeeeaeeeeeeaoeve2e2ee2eeee e808 e888 8 OF 9 2 12 Link special register SW 1 Definition F Link special register is a register used to store the communication status and error ee contents of the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master local 85 module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module and a MELSECNET H module Since link special registers store the data link information as numerical data the error locations and error causes can be identified by monitoring link special registers 2 Number of link special register points 3 The number of link special register points is as described in Table9 4 Table9 4 Number of link special register points of each CPU module 1536 points SWO to 5FF The number of device points for link special registers is 512 in the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master x local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network E module and MELSECNET H module The link specia
77. for when a program cannot be written 12 2 12 Flowchart for when the CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer 12 3 Error Code List 12 3 1 Error codes 12 3 2 Reading an error code 12 3 3 Error code list 1000 to 1999 12 3 4 Error code list 2000 to 2999 12 3 5 Error code list 3000 to 3999 12 3 6 Error code list 4000 to 4999 12 3 7 Error code list 5000 to 5999 12 3 8 Error code list 8000 to 9000 we wo wos YH YS wD 12 4 Canceling Errors 12 5 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module 12 6 Special Relay List 12 7 Special Register List APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions Appendix 1 1 CPU module Appendix 1 2 Power supply module Appendix 1 3 Main base unit Appendix 2 Safety CPU Module Upgrade Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Appendix 4 1 Disposal precautions Appendix 4 2 Exportation precautions INDEX A 16 ABOUT MANUALS Introduction Manual Read the following manual before designing and constructing a safety system Manual Name Safety Application Guide Explains the overview construction method laying and wiring examples and application programs of the safety related system Sold separately Manual No Model Code SH 080613ENG 13JR90 The manuals related to this product are listed below Please place an order as needed Related Man
78. history Initialize to Clock data 2005 1 1 00 00 00 N 1 0 Nunber Assignment OPO05 SYSTEM INITIALIZE PLC MEMORY is recorded in the operation error history Diagram 6 9 PLC memory initialization operation overview 2 Contents of PLC memory initialization processing Table6 8 shows the contents of PLC memory initialization processing Handled by CPU Module n amp T ge n o E fe z o Table6 8 Contents of PLC memory initialization processing Item Contents of initialization processing Program memory The data is erased State in which not even one file exists Standard ROM The data is erased State in which not even one file exists CPU access password Not registered Safety CPU operation mode Enters TEST MODE g Operation error history After the history is erased the following operation error history is E recorded e OP005 SYSTEM INITIALIZE PLC MEMORY e OP100 POWER ON e 2200 MISSING PARAMETER 35 Clock data Initializes to 2005 01 01 00 00 00 Re ROM write count 2 is added 2 50 Eas SES Parameters 6 4 PLC memory initialization 6 21 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAS cries 3 PLC memory initialization execution possible not possible PLC memory initialization can be executed in the following cases SAFETY MODE Safety CPU operation mode SAFETY MODE a TEST MODE wait for restart CPU operation status RUN STOP STOP RU
79. in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Assignment image Cancel Diagram 8 10 Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards screen for CC Link IE Controller Network setting Table8 12 List of CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNETIH setting items Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Nunber of MELSECNET 5000x Starting I O No 5NMO0u Network No Group No 05mnn Set the network parameters for Refer to the manuals of CC Link A ENM CC Link IE Controller Network IE Controller Network and J Seon No and MELSECNET H MELSECNET H Mode 5NMOH Refresh parameters 5NM14 Routing parameters 50034 1 Settable only for CC Link IE Controller Network 8 2 Network Parameters 8 12 Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intelligent Function Module Performance Specification Memories and Files Overview 1 O Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Functions g o 2 a E E a PARAMETERS MELSEC LES erie 3 Ethernet setting Set the network parameters for the Ethernet W Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards Network type Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Mode On line Operational settings Open settings Router relay parameter Stati
80. instruction completion abnormal normal device comperon completion levice M201 SET M203 7 CLOSE CLOSE instruction instruction abnormal bi I completion soista device RST M210 7 CLOSE instruction in execution Fig App 2 Program example using I O signals Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module App 43 APPENDICES MELSEC LES eres 3 BUFRCV instruction Fig App 3 shows a program example where buffer memory addresses are replaced with I O signals in the program for reading received data from the fixed buffer of the connection No 1 TableApp 32 Buffer memory address I O signal correspondence Buffer memory address f O signal in hexadecimal decimal 50004 20480 Open completion signal X10 Connection 1 open completion Y8 Connection 1 open request This corresponding signal cannot be used since the signal does not turn ON OFF by the OPEN instruction 5002 20482 Open request signal 5005 20485 Fix buffer receive status signal X0 Connection 1 fix buffer receive status When the I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F lt lt lt Fixed buffer No 1 receiving program Main program gt gt gt M5100 X19 X10 XO M500 z o ra PLS m5000 Receive Initial Connection Connection BUFRCV Receive instruction normal 1 open 1 fix buffer instruction instruction completion completion recei
81. memory initialization iS 3 Click the Yes button lt i D D c zZ e Are the CPU access passwords of the NO GX Developer and the CPU module the same 8 MELSOFT series GX Developer 8 lt YES Could not verify CPU access password i Currently connected PLC is not the PLC assigned for this project HS o Perform forced execution of PLC memory initialization p 5 Xo Before performing a forced initialization check the currently connected PLC carefully 5 o E Yes i st ez YES Is PLC memory initialization executed as mandatory Functions MELSOFT series GX Developer PLC memory initialization request was issued PLC memory initialization may take several minutes After PLC memory initialization is completed PLC error LED light will blink Until PLC error LED light does not go of do not turn off the PLC power S There is a possibility of damaging the PLC if the power is turn off during the process E S BE T Lobes J 55o y FE 1 528 End Of amp sS Continued to the next page Diagram 6 10 PLC memory initialization procedure a g o E z v A 6 4 PLC memory initialization 6 23 6 FUNCTIONS 6 24 MELSEC LES ries 1 During PLC memory initialization The ALIVE LED on the front of the CPU module lights up and the other LEDs flash ON a Flashing avet J TEST PEN
82. not covered Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm 9 85 inch away in all directions of the programmable controller Not doing so can cause a malfunction Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so could result in damage to the product Restrict the mounting removal of a module base unit and terminal block up to 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Transportation Precautions CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on
83. oe Memory drive 0 126K bytes lt gt Section 5 1 2 capacity Standard ROM 128K bytes i drive 4 y K Section 5 1 3 Mers numberet Piegren mamery 3 lt gt Section 5 1 2 files stored Standard ROM 32 S Section 5 1 3 No of times of writing data into the standard ROM Max 100000 times No of I O device points No of I O points 6144 points X YO to 17FF 1024 points X YO to 3FF The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below Program capacity File header size default 34 steps lt 3 Refer to CHAPTER 5 for details of the program capacity and file 2 Each of parameter sequence program and device comment files can be stored 3 The refresh mode batch accesses I O modules before start of sequence program operation No of points usable on program No of points accessible to the actual I O module 2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION Item Internal relay M Link relay B Table2 1 Performance Specifications Continue QS001CPU 6144 points by default M0 6143 changeable 2048 points by default BO to 7FF changeable Timer T 512 points by default TO to 511 changeable Sharing of low and high speed timers The low and high speed timers are specified by the instructions The measurement unit of the low and high speed timers is set up by parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit 100ms by default High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms
84. of online change X100 Ea PLS Mo JH END 0 AEND O A END 0 Re 1 scan ae X100 status ES ON S o X100 oo OFF ne OFF OFF MO ON OFF r gt _ N ON Eee X100 558 OFF 58 ON BBs ON ON yo 5a OFF se 3 aow ON 4 X100 E A oo OFF The leading edge instruction is not a a executed even the execution a OFF gt ON oi i condition is OFF ON S MO 5 OFF L L F lt Diagram 6 28 Leading edge instruction operation 3 E The corresponding instructions are PLS OP 3 o 2 nol gS LD 25 o gt E 3 OG r ez Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 14 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN 6 57 6 14 1 Online change in ladder mode 6 FUNCTIONS M LS iG QS 6 15 Watchdog Timer WDT 1 Definition of Watchdog Timer WDT The watchdog timer is an internal sequence timer to detect CPU module hardware and sequence program error 2 Watchdog Timer Setting and Reset a Watchdog timer setting The watchdog timer setting can be changed at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box The default value of the watchdog timer is 200 ms The setting range is 10 to 2000 ms in 10ms units b Watchdog timer resetting CPU module resets the watchdog timer during the END processing When the END instruction is executed within the set value of the watchdog timer in the sequence p
85. past from the error history lt gt Section 6 8 E 2 State after error canceled If the CPU module is recovered by canceling the error the special relays special E registers and LEDs related to errors return to the pre error states e The error history does not change If the same error occurs again after it has been canceled it is recorded into the 2 operation error history again gs 3 Canceling annunciator ce When canceling multiple detected annunciators only the F number first detected is 5 canceled a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 33 6 7 2 Cancel the error 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LOS cries 4 Canceling errors when multiple errors occur When multiple continuation errors occur and an error is canceled the CPU module LED display and error information are as follows i 4 Error inf ti Error canceling state LED display rror information ERR LED BAT LED USER LED SMO SM15 SM16 SDO 26 Before error canceled ON The error information for the continuation error that occurred last is stored The continuation error that occurred ON Returns to the no error state last is canceled There are continuation errors remaining that have not been canceled A continuation error other than the ON No change last one is canceled The error information for the continua
86. special registers lt gt Section 6 11 Remote password setting function lt 5 Section 6 16 ibili Version 8 82L Safety FB compatibility lt 37 QSCPU 11042 or later ersion Programming Manual Safety FB or later CC Link IE Field Network compatibility lt 37 MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 13042 or later Version 8 98C pe or later Access range expansion of the safety CPU module L gt Appendix 8 Increasing of the number of refresh parameter settings for CC Link IE Controller Network Version 8 107M 14052 or later CC Link IE Controller Network Reference or later Manual Appendix 9 Safety CPU Module Upgrade App 53 INDEX 0 to 9 5VDC internal current consumption 2 2 A ACCUIAGCY us sa eE Gane EREE ode etn Bate 9 22 Accuracy of scan time 3 5 Allowable instantaneous power failure period 2 2 Annunciator F Processing at anunciator OFF 9 13 Processing at anunciator ON 9 11 Annunciator F 200000020ee eee 2 2 B B Link relay 2 2 0 6 02 0 eee eee eee 9 15 BCD binary coded decimal 3 18 BIN binary code 00 eee eee ee 3 16 Boot file setting 00 eee eee 5 10 Boot FUN ect 5 2 Madrend wath tag Adil aa dolbentes 5 9 C Cancel the error 202000005 6 32 Changing the clock data 6
87. steps Display on GX Developer 34 steps 491 steps 525 steps Diagram 5 11 File status on GX Developer 2 Since a file is stored in file size units on the program memory the program capacity displayed during programming by GX Developer may differ from the capacity of the program file on the CPU module lt 37 Section 5 3 4 5 15 5 2 Program File Structure D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M LS 26 SS 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions 5 3 1 File operation Overview The files stored in program memory and the standard ROM can be operated with GX Developer online operations However the file operations that can be executed depend on the safety CPU operation mode and the CPU module RUN STOP status Refer to Section 6 2 5 Performance Specification 5 3 2 Precautions for handling files 1 About power off including resets during file operations When the programmable controller is power off or a CPU module is reset during file operations with GX Developer the files in each memory become uncertain During file operations with GX Developer do not power off the programmable controller or reset a CPU module Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment ol 2 3 3 fe o Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x n 2 T ke oO n A fe E v Functions Intelligent Function Communicati
88. tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box The constant scan time can be set in the range of 1 to 2000 ms in units of 1 ms MELSECIEN res When executing constant scanning set the constant scanning time When not executing a constant scanning leave the constant scanning time blank QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting WDT Watchdog timer setting WOT Setting 200 ins 10ms 2000ms Initial execution monitoring time ms 10ms 2000ms Low speed ms 10ms 2000ms execution monitoring time Operating mode when there is an error Computation error Expanded command error Fuse blown 120 module comparison error Intelligent module program execution error Memory card access error Memory card operation error External power supply OFF Error check E r i Constant scanning 1q ms 1ms 2000ms Low speed program execution time ms 1ms 2000ms Breakdown history ce c Corresponding Mo memory File name History No Item 16 100 Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check End Cancel 6 9 Constant scan Setting the constant scanning time Diagram 6 16 When constant scanning time is set to 10ms 6 FUNCTIONS M BIRS AG QS a Setting time condition As the constant scan time set a value that satisfies the following relational expression Overview WDT Set Time gt Constant
89. the programmable controller or mechanical system interlock Checking the operation error history The CPU module records 3000 incidents of the operation error history Section 6 8 The operation error history can be checked by using GX Developer Diagnostics PLC diagnostics The operation error history is backed up by battery even if the programmable controller is power off CPU module operation when an error is detected Stop error continuation error When an error is detected by the self diagnostics the CPU module has the following two types of operations a When an error that stops CPU module operations is detected At the point when the CPU module detects the error it stops operations and turns all external output OFF Device memory output Y is held The error which stops operation is referred to as a stop error b When an error that allows CPU module operations to continue is detected Even when the CPU module detects the error it continues to execute the program The error which continues operation is referred to as a continuation error 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 FUNCTIONS 6 List of self diagnostics The error messages in the Error message column in the Table6 11 can be checked Detailed item Diagnostics subject MELSEC LES res on the screen displayed by selecting Diagnostics PLC Diagnostics in GX Developer Table6 11 List of self diagnostics Diagn
90. the STOP state Power s ppi The programmable controller was power pula OP100 POWER ON on Or the CPU module reset was operation canceled Drive operation OP144 WRITE PRGRAM MEMORY To ROM he write to ROM of program memory data standard ROM was executed Remar OP160 SWITCH TO RUN REMOTELY The remote RUN operation was executed operation OP161 SWITCH TO STOP REMOTELY Theremote STOP operation Was executed eG SWITCH SAFETY PC OPERATION The safety CPU operation mode was operation mode OP180 MODE switched operation History operation OP200 CLEAR OPERATION ERROR LOG The operation error history in the CPU module was cleared Clock operation OP210 ADJUST SYSTEM CLOCK The CPU module clock was set CPUaccess password OP220 MODIFY ACCESS PASSWORD In the CPU module the CPU access pass operation word was set 6 36 b Self diagnostics error The contents of the self diagnostics error detected by the CPU module are stored For details on self diagnostics errors refer to the following manual lt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 Operation history capacity The contents of 3000 operations and errors can be stored in the operation error history of the CPU module When the total number of operations and errors exceeds 3000 the oldest content is overwritten with the latest one in order 6 8 Recording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error histo
91. the system monitor of GX Developer 1 Checking on rating plate The rating plate is on the side face of the CPU module MELSEC QS r MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No first 5 digits function version Standard symbol for conformance is described aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Diagram 1 11 Rating plate 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial number written on the rating plate is displayed on the front at the bottom of the module QS001CPU ALIVE TEST RUN USER ERR BAT to aaan S AA Diagram 1 12 CPU module front display 1 10 1 4 How to Check the Serial No and Function Version 1 OVERVIEW 3 Confirming the serial No on the system monitor Product Information List To display the System monitor screen select Diagnostics System monitor and click the Product Information List button in GX Developer ELS 26 eerie Overview On the system monitor the serial No and function version of the intelligent function module can also be confirmed Serial number function version Product Information List Model name Points I 0 No Master PLC QS001LCPU QS0J61BT12 32pt 0000 QU71LP21 25 32pt 0020 None Intelli Q5 Intelli Q None Serial No 080910000000000 080110000000000 060120000000000 Performance Specif
92. the transport regulations For details of the controlled models refer to QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product s compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 EN954 1 ISO13849 1 from TUV Rheinland this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving and MELCO shall not be liable for a default a liability for defect warranty a quality assurance negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications a power plants b trains railway systems airplanes airline operations other transportation systems c hospitals medical care dialysis and life support facilities or equipment d amusement equipments e incineration and fuel devices YS wer me Ww f handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals g mining and drilling h and other applications w
93. the write count is within the ee he coun guaranteed count 100 000 othe END 1610 REWRIT ERR instruction Fe Checks that the mounting status of the e During execution 21 z g intelligent function module has not been of the END 2000 MODULE VERIFY ERROR during operation changed since power ON or reset operation instruction Checks that the intelligent function module are mounted according to the I O assignment setting of PLC parameter Checks that the number of mounted At ON intelligent function module are within the power 2100 2106 MODULE LAYOUT ERROR At reset 2107 setting range A Checks that the start I O numbers of 22 Module configuration intelligent function module are not overlapping Checks that dule i ited di At ON ecks a no module is mounted exceeding power 2124 MODULE LAYOUT ERROR the I O points can be used actually At reset Checks that a module that can not be used s A At power ON such as I O module intelligent function 2125 MODULE LAYOUT ERROR A At reset module GOT is mounted ist i At ON ee CECS that parameters exist in the CPU power 2200 MISSING PARAMETER module At reset At power ON i At reset 3000 3001 Checks that th setting in PEC parameter When CC Link 3003 3004 PARAMETER ERROR meets the specifications Safety remote 3008 station returned Checks that the setting in Network parameter lt At power ON 3100 3101 NETWORK PARAMETER for the network module me
94. to the CPU module internal circuit is detected 1 4 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES ries 5 USB interface is equipped The CPU module is equipped with the USB interface to communicate with a programming tool Overview Re Ze oO ie Personal computer 2 Eo Figure 1 3 Connection to a personal computer using USB 5 S 5 256 BES 6 Connectable with personal computers and standard programmable 55 zog controllers Yi The CPU module can read data from the MELSOFT products installed in the personal computer and also can communicate data between safety programmable controller and standard programmable controller using dedicated instructions via CC Link IE E Controller Network MELSECNET H and or Ethernet z 2 Besides the data of ladder monitor device monitor and operation error history in the E safety programmable controller can be read using GOT e xo a3 o2 Bre Zo 28 Do 3 F Pa Be Personal computer 2 2 Figure 1 4 Connection with personal computer and standard programmable controller Le 1 For an access range from GX Developer and a GOT to a safety CPU module refer to Appendix 8 2 An access to the CPU module can be restricted by using the remote password function c 28 5 Si oO g E 1 1 Features 1 5 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES res 7 Safety communication is enabled in the CC Link IE Field Network A CC Link IE Field Network master lo
95. transmission error detection time check Transient transmission enabled even at CPU module error Appendix 4 Restrictions on Using CC Link IE Controller Network Module with Safety CPU Module O O O O O O O x O O O x O To the next page App 29 Device Explanation Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES MELSEC LES eres TableApp 20 List of CC Link IE Controller Network functions and their availability in safety CPU module continued Function Availability Hardware test O Self loopback test Diagnostic function Ee es Station to station test Network test Communication test Interrupt request to CPU module Station No setting by sequence program xixixixi OIOIO O Available x Not available 1 Data cannot be written to the safety CPU module from the CPU module on another station gt Appendix 7 1 App 30 Appendix 4 Restrictions on Using CC Link IE Controller Network Module with Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELEGEN erie Appendix 5 Restrictions on Using MELSECNET H Module with Safety CPU Module 1 Network parameters which can be set in the safety CPU module 3 TableApp 21 lists the network parameters for MELSECNET H and their setting availability with GX Developer when the MELSECNET H module is used with the p safety CPU module 7 TableApp 21 List of network parameters and t
96. words x 1 6144 points Internal 7 l M 10 8K 8192 points MO to 8191 16 512 words x 1 8192 points relay Link relay B 16 1K 1024 points B0000 to O3FF 16 64 words x 1 1024 points Annunciator F 10 1K 1024 points FO to 1023 16 64 words x 1 1024 points Link special SB 16 1 5K 1536 points SB0000 to O5FF 16 96 words x 1 1536 points relay Edge relay V 10 1K 1024 points VO to 1023 16 64 words x 1 1024 points Timer T 10 1K 1024 points TO to 1023 x 1152 words x 2 2048 points Retentive 18 F f ST 10 1K 1024 points STO to 1023 X46 1152 words x 2 2048 points imer Counter C 10 1K 1024 points CO to 1023 x 1152 words x 2 2048 points Data D 10 4K 4096 points DO to 4095 x1 4096 words register Link register W 16 1K 1024 points W0000 to 03FF x1 1024 words Link special 7 SW 16 1 5K 1536 points SW0000 to OSFF x1 1536 words register f 11680 words Device total 31232 points 12384 words or less 14 The hatched number of points is fixed Unchangeable 2 The maximum number of points of one device is 32K points 3 Enter the value that is obtained by multiplying or dividing the number of device points by the numeral indicated in the capacity Word field 9 2 Internal User Devices Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 QS ies 9 2 1 Input X 1 Definition Inputs transmit commands or data to the CPU module from an
97. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 10 CHAPTERS MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE 5 1to5 19 5 1 Memories by CPU Module cocoooooooocooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 Memory configuration and storable data ececccccocoooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 1 Program MEMOTry eeecccccccccccccccccoccccccccccccoccccoccccccccccccccccccccocccccococccccococccococceccocooo D 3 Standard ROM ccoooooocooooooooooooooo0oo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 7 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writingeeeeeeeeecesesccesocoocooeccccccccccoseeseoee 5H 9 5 2 Program File Structure COCO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOE 5 14 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautionse eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeceecececoececococceoeoeo0 5 16 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 CHAPTER6 FUNCTIONS File OperatiOon eeesesesesecececcccccococococccococococccococccococccccocoscscsococccccoccocsoocccococosococoo 5 16 Precautions for handling files COCOCOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOOOOO OOOO OOOCOOOCE 5 16 Memory capacities of files COCO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOO 5 17 File size Uli ts ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc
98. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 28 6 7 1 6 7 2 LED display for Error ecocccccocooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 32 Cancel the Error coccccccooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 32 6 8 Recording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error history function CO OCOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOSOO 6 35 6 9 Constant SCAN 00 ecccccccccccccccccccc ccc 0ccc eee 0e0000e 0000000000000 00000 000e eee 0ee eee eseeseeeesessesseeseeeeeee 6 39 A 11 6 10 Setting of Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN seeeseescescesccseccescescesees G 42 6 11 Clock Function COCCOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OL OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OO OOO OOOO SOO OO OOO OOOOCOOOCE 6 5 45 6 12 Remote Operation COC OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOS 6 48 6 12 1 Remote RUN STOP COCOCOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOOH OOOOOOO OOOO OOOOOOOO 6 48 6 12 2 Remote RESET eccccooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 51 6 12 3 Relationship of remote operation and CPU s RUN STOP status eeeeseeseeeeoeoeccceceecese
99. 101 occurs 2 The REQ instruction only reads and writes clock data If other operations are requested an OPERATION ERROR error code 4001 occurs PoC CCCCOCCHOSOCHEEEOCHOHOHSEOHSEEHOOHOHOOECHOHOOOHOHEOHCEOHOOHOO EEL EEOO S For dedicated instructions supported on CC Link IE Field Network refer to each manual for CC Link IE Field Network eeeseee eceeseeceoeeoeeeeeaeoeoeeeoeeeeceoeeeeoeeeoeoeoeeeaeoeoeeaooaoe eee e ee Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU App 39 Module Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie 2 Dedicated instructions which can be used from the CPU module on another station to the safety CPU module TableApp 28 lists the dedicated instructions which can be used from the CPU module on another station to the safety CPU module TableApp 28 List of available dedicated instructions Supported network Dedicated CC Link IE Application Function description MELSECNET instruction Controller Network H Reads data from word devices of the CPU READ O O O module on another station Reads data from word devices of the CPU For communication with SREAD module on another station with completion O O O programmable controller CPU A devices on another station Data link N Reads clock data from the CPU module on instruction
100. 13 3 7 1 BIN Binary COdE eeeeeeeccococoococeoceoccccccoccccccccococoococecccccccccceccoccococcocoococcooccecocccoseo 3 16 3 7 2 HEX Hexadecimal eeeeseeseeeeeeececceccocoocoococcceccccccccccccccccoccocoococcccccccocccoccoccocoocooo 3 17 A 10 3 7 3 CHAPTER4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT BCD Binary Coded Decimal eeeeeeecceccceccececcecccccccccccccocoococccccocccccccccoccocoococoooooeocooe 3 18 4 1to4 10 4 1 Definition of O Number escccccccococoocoooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 i 1 4 2 Concept of I O Number Assignment cooocoooooooooooooooooooooooo0000o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 I O numbers of base UnNit ececccecocococoocoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000 2 I O numbers of remote station cooococoooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 4 3 I O Assignment by GX Developer coocoooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer cococoooooooooooooooooooooooooo0o000o0000000000000000000000 4 5 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer sesesesesesesesesesoseeccocosocccocososococososososose 4 G Examples of 1 0 Number AssigNMente eeeeceeccccceccececccccccceccoccoccococoococecoecccoccccccesceseoee A 9 4 4 Checking the I O Numbers 0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000
101. 15 to b4 b3 to b0 SD243 No of base D243 Empty Main slots No of base SD244 Empty n Operation slots S nitial a As shown above each area stores the number of slots being SD244 installed Number of set slots when parameter setting has been made b15 to b4 b3 to bO SD245 No of base SD245 Empty Main slots No of base SD246 Empty Mounti lot S Initial Mounting S10lS As shown above each area stores the numbers of module sD246 status mounted slots of the base unit actual number of slots of the installed base unit App 16 Appendix 2 Special Register List Corresponding CPU QS APPENDICES MELEGEN erie TableApp 12 Special register z oO Set b Cc di rel Number Name Meaning Explanation nner oa parte ma S Loaded Loaded maximum The upper 2 digits of the final I O number plus 1 of the T 3 SD250 S Initial maximum I O I O No modules loaded are stored as BIN values initial a sp254 Number of Indicates the number of mounted CC Link IE Controller modules mounted Network or MELSECNET H modules 2 c Indicates the I O number of mounted CC Link IE Controller 5 3 See CCLinkiE YO number Network or MELSECNET H module S Controll T Hd e Indicates the network number of mounted CC Link IE id A agg Network Network numbet Controller Network or MELSECNET H module S initial 3 ______ MELSECNET Z IH information e Indicates the group number of mounted CC Link IE
102. 3 5 Sequence program Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 1 Sequence Program 3 4 3 1 2 Sequence program operation 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION 3 5 MELSEC LES res 3 2 Concept of Scan Time 1 Scan time Scan time is a period from the time when the CPU module starts the sequence program operation from Step 0 until it executes Step 0 of the same sequence program again The scan time consists of the sequence program execution time and the END processing time a Scan time storage location The CPU module measures the current value and minimum and maximum values of the scan time and stores them into the special registers SD520 SD521 SD524 to 527 The scan time can be checked by monitoring SD520 SD521 and SD524 to 527 Current value D520 SD521 Minimum value SD524 SD525 Maximum value SD526 SD527 Stores scan time of 1ms or less unit ws gt Stores scan time in 1ms units Diagram 3 6 Scan time storage location When SD520 is 3 and SD521 is 400 the scan time is 3 4ms b Accuracy and measurement of scan time The accuracy of each scan time stored into the special registers is 0 1ms c Scan time watch The CPU module has scan time watch timers watchdog timers lt 37 2 in this section 3 2 Concept of Scan Time 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 3 MELSEC LES erie WDT Watchdog timer The wa
103. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Safety Programmable Controller MEL SLC LES rie QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals QS001CPU SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and AN CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage wm e e e e e Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under AN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING When a safety programmable controller detects an error in an external power supply or a failure in programmable controller it turns off all the outputs Create an external circuit to securely stop the power of hazard by turning off the outputs Incorrect configuration may result in an accident Create short current protection for a safety relay and a protection circuit such as a fuse and breaker outside a safety programmable co
104. A11 A11 A11 NET H H GXD1 GX GXD1 G4 GOT B11 i A1 A2 B2 A2 A2 1 RS 232 i ea E a GXW2 exw2 exwa Gxw2 Gxw2 Iexw2 A11 A11 B11 A11 A11 B11 CC Link ClEcont QSCPU Si W or Ethernet ppectink A3 afety NET H A3 A3 Can be connected up to QCPU QCPU CC Link GXD1 GXD1 7 layers in the system A12 B12 A12 A3 A3 y l Ethernet GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT A12 B12 A12 A12 CClEcont QCPU QCPU Ethernet or C24 __ CClEcont A4 B4 A4 NET H A4 QSCPU CC Link CCIEfie A4 AG Safety Safety NET H A6 A6 AG GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GOT Can be connected up to A4 B4 A4 A4 A5 GXD1 GXD1 7 layers in the system A6 As ra C CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H Bus CClEcont GOT connection QCPU QCPU or CCIEfie C24 CC Link Ethernet A7 A7 B7 NET H A7 A7 A7 B7 A7 RS 232 IGXW2 IGXW2 Gxw2 IGXW2 IGXW2 IGXW2 GOT AT A7 B7 A7 A7 B7 A8 CC Link QCPU QCPU CC Link A9 B9 A9 GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT A9 B9 A9 A9 App 50 Fig App 7 Access range Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie uogeuejdxg 9o1A9q b Accessibility TableApp 37 Accessibility pe o D i G n n a 5 lt source QSCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU A0 A1 A2 137 A3 A4 B4 A6 A7 B7 A9 B9 A10 A11 B11 A12 B12 Ey Bulsseo0iq ANPON Ado O MNP
105. Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 14s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 18 to 2 59s TYP 2 07s d at 25 C Accuracy 12 97 to 3 63s TYP 3 16s d at 55 C Setting by parameters Section 6 11 Allowable instantaneous power failure Varies depending on the power supply module period 5VDC internal current consumption 0 58A4 a H 98mm 3 86inch ae External dimensions Ww 55 2mm 2 17inch D 114mm 4 49inch ne Weight 0 29kg Protection of degree IP2X oe 4 The value for the CPU module with a serial number first four digits of 1207 or earlier is as follows 5VDC internal current consumption 0 43A Refer to the following manual for the general specifications Remark EXER RRR eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee L QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection eeeeeeevneeeveeoeeeeoeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeseeeoeeeeeeeeeeeaeee eee eee 2 2 Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intelligent Function Module Overview o SS cs Ow Eg 55 C oa awn 1 0 Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Parameters 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION M CHAPTER3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION The CPU module executes a program in the following order Initial processing gt y I O refresh v Program operation processing Y END processing Diagram 3 1
106. CD 2 digit code Example 10 a m on 25th H2510 b15 to b amp b7 to bO Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 Stores the minute and second when SDO data was updated as BCD 2 digit code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 Example 35 min 48 sec H3548 Category codes to identify what type of error information is stored in the common information SD5 to SD15 or in the individual information SD16 to SD26 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Individual information Common information category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Module No Base No 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value set 4 Program error location 9 CC Link Safety information 10 Module No Station No 11 CC Link IE Field Network information The individual information category codes store the following codes No error File name Drive name Time value actually measured Program error location Parameter number Annunciator F number 9 Error information 10 CC Link Safety information 11 Program abort information 12 File diagnostics information 13 CC Link IE Field Network information 0 2 3 4 5 6 Appendix 2 Special Register List S Error S Error Corresponding CPU Qs APPENDICES MELSEC ES erie TableApp 10 Special re
107. CD code at SD211 as shown below Clock data b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bo Example SD211 Clock data day hour cd TE m a 25st 10 a m eed a 2B Day Hour The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below Clock data b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bOExample S Request U SD212 Cl k d ti T T T T T T T T T T T l lock data minute second zg TE tr bo 35 min 48 sec a L L L L L i L ih L L ni 3548H Minute Second Stores the year two digits and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b0 Example rit fort t fat 2006 Monday i 1 I ik I i ii I i I l 1 Clock data L L L ni i L in L L L L 1 igi X 2001H later digits of SD213 Clock data Day of the week year day of 0 Sunday week Higher digits of year 19 or 20 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday SD232 ROM writ ROM writ S Writing t ws WS Store the ROM write count up to now nese SD233 count count up to now ROM 0 Automatic a D240 Base mode sande Stores the base mode 0 fixed S Initial Extension 0 Main base Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being o SD241 S Initial stage number only installed 0 fixed Base typ b15 to b1 b0 Installed Q differentiation b 0 Base not Empty ase Base no D242 i i S Initial presence installed Main base unit initial absence 1 QS B is installed b
108. CPU module Execute the program operations KX CC Link Safety master module Overview Performance Specification 2 Program BPs parameters and Zee device data can be T 2 changed BESES 23 a6o8 now J Input from the Output the program S controlled system operation results g GX Developer 5 Diagram 6 2 TEST MODE operation fa 5 Z QD ooo oo coo coerce Q For details on the GX Developer operations that can be executed in SAFETY MODE and in TEST MODE refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Safety 3 O Programmable Controller ee eeeeseeeceaceoeoeeoeseeceeaeeoeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee eee eeeeeeoeeeeoee ee ee ae na OG SE a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 1 Safety CPU operation mode O 9 6 FUNCTIONS M LS AG lN 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching Diagram 6 3 shows the state when the safety CPU operation mode is switched At the factory When safety CPU operation mode becomes unstable due to low battery voltage l TEST MODE programmable controller power on CPU module reset cancel SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE programmable controller power on CPU module reset cancel programmable controller power on CPU module reset cancel Safety CPU operation mode switching SAFETY MODE to TEST MODE Safety CPU
109. Change of the value When programmable controller power supply is turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start Corresponding CPU Qs APPENDICES Number Name Meaning OFF Other than TEST SM560 uae MODE MODE a ON TEST MODE Continuous OFF Within the setting RUN of time SM561 _ tolerance time setting for the ON Over the setting TEST MODE time 5 Boot operation Number Name Meaning OFF Program memory execution SM660__ Boot ti PO SERRE ON During boot operation Number Name Meaning BIN DBIN OFF mans na SM722 instruction error pe A ON Error detection not disabling flag 4 Safety CPU TableApp 5 Special relay Explanation Turns ON when operating on the TEST MODE Turns OFF when operating on the other mode SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE wait for restart Turns ON when the continuous RUN of tolerance time set for the TEST MODE in the parameter is exceeded TableApp 6 Special relay Explanation On the TEST MODE Turns ON during the boot operation from standard ROM Turns OFF when the boot operation from standard ROM is not run On the SAFETY MODE Always ON 6 Instruction Related Special Relays TableApp 7 Special relay performed 7 CC Link Safety Explanation e Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction TableApp 8 Special relay AG Qs ie Set by Whe
110. Check End Cancel Diagram 5 7 Boot file 2 3 3 fe o Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x N T ae Cc o N AS fe E Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 10 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSEC LES erie 3 Write to standard ROM by GX Developer Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer and write the files to the program memory e Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM on GX Developer and write to the standard ROM the files written to the program memory L gt 3 in this section 4 Program execution When you carry out the following operations the system boots from the standard ROM e Restarting the programmable controller power e Reset end with the CPU module RUN STOP RESET switches e Remote reset using GX Developer 5 Check for normal boot completion Whether the boot is normally completed or not can be checked by the special relay SM660 status Refer to Appendix 1 for the special relay b Operation to stop boot run Perform the following operation using GX Developer to stop boot run and execute operation by the parameter program written to the program memory 1 Remove the checkmark from Boot from standard ROM in the PLC parameter boot file setting
111. Developer remote contact The following two options are available for remote operations e Remote RUN STOP KL Section 6 12 1 e Remote RESET lt gt Section 6 12 2 Remote RUN STOP 1 Definition of Remote RUN STOP The remote RUN STOP performs RUN STOP of the CPU module externally with the CPU module RUN STOP RESET switch at RUN 2 Applications of remote RUN STOP Using remote RUN STOP for the following remote operations are useful e When the CPU module is at a position out of reach e When performing RUN STOP of the control board CPU module externally 3 Calculations during Remote RUN STOP The program calculation that performs remote RUN STOP is as follows a Remote STOP Executes the program to the END instruction and enters the STOP status b Remote RUN When remote RUN is performed while in the STOP status using remote STOP the status changes to RUN and executes the program from step 0 6 12 Remote Operation 6 12 1 Remote RUN STOP FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES eres 4 Method with Remote RUN STOP Remote RUN STOP operation can be performed either by the RUN contact or by GX Developer a Method with RUN contact The RUN contact is set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box of GX Developer The range of devices that can be set is input XO to 17FF By turning the set RUN contact ON OFF the remote RUN STOP can be performed e When the RUN contact is OFF the CPU module enters t
112. Developer project and CPU module passwords The operation from GX Developer is permitted only when the passwords match CPU access password ABC123 Operation is possible because the Operation is not possible because the CPU access password matches CPU access password does not match ea ee A h CPU access password Zz Zz DEF123 GX ee GX oe Project A Project B Diagram 6 7 CPU access password 6 18 6 3 CPU access password 6 FUNCTIONS M LS AG lN 2 CPU access password setting and characters that can be used a CPU access password setting The CPU access password is set on the CPU access password registration change screen of GX Developer The CPU access password set is registered in the project For details on CPU access password registration change operations refer to the GX Developer Manual Safety Programmable Controller Overview Performance Specification CPU access password registration change Password settings For CPU access password CPU access certification password will be set to project setting change Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions Register to PLC For registering CPU The same password as project CPU access password is registered access password on the to PLC QS001CPU PLC register 5 E i 2 Close 5 Q c Zz Diagram 6 8 CPU access pass
113. ED 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 change o 2 35 1 RUN 5 Empty D 2 ERR 6 Empty aca 3 USER 7 TEST Qs 4 BAT 8 Empty The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure b15 to b12 b11 to p8 b7 to p4 b3 to pO Ho i i L i i i i i I 3 lt p lt gt 2 1 g o amp lt 1 Operating status 0 RUN DAE Operating Operating of CPU 2 STOP seein status of CPU status of CPU 2 STOP cause 0 Instruction in remote operation program Every from RUN STOP RESET switch 1 Remote contact 2 Remote operation from GX Developer 4 Error 5 SAFETY MODE wait for restart 6 Write to PLC was executed x Note stores the above mentioned factors from the smallest ES number in priority to the largest one However 4 error is treated as the highest priority Appendix 2 Special Register List App 15 APPENDICES TableApp 12 Special register MELSEC LES erie Set b Number Name Meaning Explanation Cire aed The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below Clock data b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bo Example SD210 Clock data r rr morr rT Geanmonth Nfs eh led eingo 2008 i L L L L i L i L ii L L 0609H Year Month The day and hour are stored as B
114. ESSING TIME M aL 26 SS 2 Calculation of scan time The scan time is calculated from the following formula Device Explanation SM Tru Tio Tie Tend Ts Tc ms e SM _ Scan time e Tru Module refresh time e Tio I O refresh time e Tie Instruction execution time e Tend Execution time for each function processed by the END e Ts Service processing time Tc Common processing time i D amp N N is B a 2 i 3 iS Pls 8 Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index 10 1 Scan Time 1 0 2 10 1 1 Structure and calculation of scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME 10 3 MELSEC LES erie 10 1 2 Time required for each processing included in scan time This section explains how to calculate the processing and execution times shown in Section 10 1 1 1 2 3 QS001CPU O refresh time I O refresh time is the refresh time for I O data between the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module and the CPU module The I O refresh time Tio will be calculated with the following formula Tio number I O points x 0 224 310 us Instruction execution time Instruction execution time is the total processing time of instructions used in the program to be executed in the CPU module Fo
115. EVICE EXPLANATION This chapter describes all devices that can be used in the CPU module 9 1 Device List The names and data ranges of devices which can be used in the CPU module are shown in Table9 1 Table9 1 Device List Default Values Parameter i i Reference Device Name Number of Designated i Range Used Section Points Setting Range Input 6144 points XO to 17FF Hexadecimal Section 9 2 1 Output 6144 points YO to 17FF Hexadecimal Section 9 2 2 Bit Internal relay 6144 points MO to 6143 Decimal Section 9 2 3 icy Annunciator 1024 points FO to 1023 Decimal Section 9 2 4 evICes Edge relay 1024 points VO to 1023 Decimal Section 9 2 5 Link relay 2048 points BO to 7FF Hexadecimal Section 9 2 6 een ee Special link relay 1536 points SBO to 5FF Hexadecimal Changeable Section 9 2 7 cee Timer 512 points TOto511 Decimal p z 12384 words 2 Section 9 2 8 Retentive timer 0 points Decimal i Word Counter 512 points CO to 511 Decimal Section 9 2 9 devices Data register 6144 points DO to 6143 Decimal Section 9 2 10 Link register 2048 points WO to 7FF Hexadecimal Section 9 2 11 Link special 1536 points SWO to 5FF Hexadecimal Section 9 2 12 register Bit Internal deii Special relay 5120 points SMO to 5119 Decimal Section 9 3 1 evices system Unchangeable devices Special register 5120 points SDO to 5119 Decimal S
116. EX the CPU module performs operation regarding the value of a register as 1 3 17 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 3 7 2 HEX Hexadecimal 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES erie 3 7 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal 1 BCD notation BCD binary coded decimal is a numbering system in which one digit of DEC decimal is expressed in BIN binary Though it uses 4 bit representation like hexadecimal notation it dose not use letters Ay to Fy Table3 6 shows the numeric expressions of BIN BCD and DEC Overview Performance Specification Table3 6 Comparison of BIN BCD and DEC Numeric Expressions BCD 3 DEC Decimal BIN Binary i Binary Coded Decimal 7 E_6 0 0000 0 E 58 1 0001 1 B 2 0010 10 FE 3 0011 11 4 0100 100 5 0101 101 E 6 0110 110 P 7 0111 111 8 1000 1000 S 9 1001 1001 en g 10 1010 1 0000 a Sany 11 1011 1 0001 K 12 1100 1 0010 ne 2 BCD numeric expression ce CPU module registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits 5 In case of 16 bits O to 9999 can be specified in BCD POINT The CPU module regards value stored in BCD as BIN For example if 8000 is stored in BCD the CPU module performs operation regarding the value as 32768 When performing arithmetic operation between values stored in BCD and any values in the CPU module use the operation instruction of the BCD Functions Communication wit
117. F ZT In SAFETY MODE boot operation is executed regardless of the boot file settings na 5 5 Le 35 Se or E So EGS SEs g o 2 a E E a 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 6 PARAMETERS MELSEC LES ries 6 I O assignment Set the mounting status of each module in the system QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Bootfile 1 0 assignment Satety setting 1 0 Assignment Switch setting Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Auto Main C Detail Ext Basel Ext Base2 Ext Base3 ExtBased Base model name Power model name Extension cable Slots _ Read PLC data a ee e S Diagram 8 6 I O assignment Table8 6 I O assignment list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Type cia orhe mounted Empty intelli No setting Model Set the model name of the ae mounted module User memo 16 characters No setting Not used for the CPU module 1 0 i 04001 0 points 16 points 32 points Section 4 3 assignment bOI Set the number of points of each 48 points 64 points No setting slot 128 points 256 points 512 points 1024 points Start XY Start 1 0 ei iE E No setting No
118. FF or the CPU module is reset 9 28 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 10 Data register D Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELEGEN res 9 2 11 Link register W 1 Definition Link register is a CPU module side memory used when refreshing the link register LW data of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module to the CPU c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a module 3 CC Link IE Controller CPU module Network module e Link register Link register z Bs wo LWO SE Link refresh Link refresh setting range j 2 28 P gt o 2 E aa Diagram 9 34 Link refresh Link register can store numerical data 32768 to 32767 or OOOOH to FFFFH 2 Bit configuration of link register a Bit configuration and read and write units Link registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16 bit x units b15 to bO Wail e o aae a aa aa T OS a a oa The most significant bit is sign bit Diagram 9 35 Bit configuration of link register POINT Link register data are handled as signed data For HEX hexadecimal 0000H to FFFFH can be stored However since the most significant bit is a sign bit the range of a value that can be specified is 32768 to 32767 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 29 9 2 11 Link register W Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 30 MELSEC LES e
119. GX Developer 4 6 4 3 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC LES res c Model name d e Set the mounted module model name within 16 characters The specified model name is not used for the CPU module It is used as a user s memo Points To change the number of occupied I O points of each slot select it from the followings e 0 point e 16 points e 32 points e 48 points e 64 points e 128 points e 256 points e 512 points e 1024 points If the number of occupied I O points is not designated for a slot the one of the actually mounted module is used Start XY When the I O number of each slot is changed you should designate the head I O number according to the change If Start XY is not designated for a slot the I O number continuing from the last number of the currently designated slot is assigned 2 Precautions for I O assignment a Slot status after I O assignment When I O assignment setting has been made to a slot that setting has precedence over the mounted module 1 When the preset number of points is less than the number of mounted intelligent function module points MODULE LAYOUT ERROR occurs Mounted module and I O assigned module type The mounted module type and the set type in the I O assignment setting must be the same If not normal operation will not be performed For the intelligent function module make sure that the numbers
120. Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Set the RUN STOP RESET switch to Appendices the RUN position to place the CPU module in the RUN status s the ERR LED of the CPU module on flickering Index Choose Diagnostics gt System Monitor lt QSCPU User s Manual on GX Developer or perform PLC Hardware Design Maintenance Diagnostics to check the error factor and and Inspection remove the error factor Boot operation in TEST MODE YES End To Section 11 3 Diagram 11 1 Flowchart for writing program 11 2 Procedure for writing program 1 1 3 1 11 4 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE 11 3 Boot run procedure This section explains a boot run procedure MELSECIEN res In the following procedure LA indicates the operation on the GX Developer side and indicates that on the CPU module side Start Continued from Section 11 2 When the RUN STOP RESET switch is in the RUN position set the switch to the STOP position In the boot file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box specify Execute boot from standard ROM Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer and write the parameters and program to the program memory Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM on GX Developer and write the program memory data to the s
121. Module Processing Time b For timer T retentive timer ST and Counter C For the timer retentive timer and counter 16 points are calculated as 18 words Total number of points of T ST C 16 Timer retentive counter capacity x 18 words Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module c For word devices For data registers D link registers W and special register SD 16 points are calculated as 16 words Total number of points of D W SD x 16 words 16 Word device capacity Appendices Ex POINT When the number of used points of internal user devices is changed with the PLC parameters any sequence program created with the pre change parameters cannot be used as it is When the number of used points of internal user devices is changed write the parameters and sequence program to the CPU module Index 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 3 Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aLS 26 Qs ie 4 Device point assignment example A device point assignment example is shown in Table9 2 Table9 2 Device point assignment example Number of device points Restriction check Number of points Number Capacity Word Number of bit points Device Numeric name notation Input relay X 16 6K 6144 points X0000 to 17FF 16 384 words x 1 6144 points Output relay Y 16 6K 6144 points YOOOO to 17FF 16 384
122. N STOP PLC memory initialization execution possible not possible Can be executed x Cannot be executed 6 22 6 4 PLC memory initialization 6 FUNCTIONS M LS AG lN 4 PLC memory initialization procedure Diagram 6 10 shows the PLC memory initialization procedure with GX Developer Overview Start Set the CPU module to the STOP status Set the CPU module RUN STOP RESET switch to the STOP position Display PLC memory initialization screen Performance Specification The PLC memory initialization screen is displayed with the following operations Online Safety CPU operation PLC memory initialization n c MELSOFT series GX Developer iS eee During current connection PLC memory will be initialized De After executing PLC memory initialization CPU condition will be as follows o c6 lt Outine of PLC memory initialzation gt a 90 Program memory Data will be deleted o Os Standard ROM Data wil be deleted e556 CPU access password Not set clos Safety CPU operation made Change to test mode 25 CPU errars operation history History will be deleted PLC memory initialization history wil be saved ate Q ROM write count Data will not be deleted 86 g For detailed information please refer to CPU manual noowWw Execute PLC memory initialization ves te Y 5 Sepsis ais E Execute PLC
123. O 5 O O O x ESS O _ _ O 823 O OFF output O O OFF output 2 7 Bee O O _ O O O O x o O 3 OFF output x a O OFF output x os 5 5 lt o 3 g O O s x x x 3 O x O O x x x 6 i O x O O x x x x O x O O x x x Be ce _ O o O O O x x G gt 2 O x O O x x x 8 2 v o Sr O x O O x x x O x O O x x x O O O O O x x O x O O x x x O x O O x x x 5 O x O O x x x z O O O O O x x O The function operates x The function does not operate This combination does not exist 3 Selecting Case of CPU STOP output setting for the network operation setting leads to the follow 5 ing operations 58 e When Hold is selected at Case of CPU STOP output setting RY status output E When Clear ALL OFF is selected at Case of CPU STOP output setting OFF output 2 So EGS S25 Parameters 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 4 Operation of each function in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status o gt a FUNCTIONS Developer M ELS AG Qs ies 6 2 5 Online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Table6 6 shows the online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Developer Table6 6 Online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Developer Safety CPU operation mode CPU operation status File operation Wr
124. O The following project data do not match with program memory VL Please execute again after you match project data and program memory Programn MAIN Yy Stopping switching TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE Click the OK button Switch to safety CPU operation mode Current operation mode EJ NO Y Checking completion of the switch to SAFETY MODE Click the OK button Switch to safety CPU operation mode amp Restart up Reset the CPU module or restart up the safety programmable controller system power Completed 2 Continued to the next page SAFETY MODE wait for restart You can return to TEST MODE by switching the safety CPU operation mode using GX Developer enables to return to the TEST MODE Diagram 6 5 TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE switching continued 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie MELSOFT series GX Developer BX Program memory and standard ROM data are different All standard ROM data will be deleted and program memory data will be saved Are you sure Select copying program memory data into ROM Click the Yes button MELSOFT series GX Developer j Prostem memory data wil be copied to ROM If communication time out checkis set up as under 180 sec
125. O numbers of remote station 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELEGEN res POINT 1 Input X and output Y can be used as a refresh destination devices on the CPU module side for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions link I O RX RY 2 Input X and output Y can be used as a refresh destination devices on the CPU module side for the CC Link IE Controller Network module link I O LX LY 3 When using CC Link Safety master modules CC Link IE Field Network mas ter local modules with safety functions and CC Link IE Controller Network modules together do not overlap refresh destination I O numbers including refresh destination I O numbers assigned to remote stations 4 When using the input X and output Y of the CPU module as the I O num bers for a network module refresh destination or a remote station assign the I O numbers after those assigned to the I O module and the intelligent func tion module on the CPU module side Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions A E oO E E D N n lt fo pe i Zz ie Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 4 2 Concept of I O Number Assignment 4 4 4 2 2 I O numbers of remote station 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 4 5 MELSEC LES ries 4 3 I
126. OFF ON Coil of T0 OFF 4 ON Contact of To _OFF 6 f Diagram 9 24 Operation when the set value is 1 d When set value is changed after time out If the set value changes to a value which is higher than the current value following a timer time out the time out status will remain in effect and timer operation will not be performed 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 23 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSECIEN res 9 2 9 Counter C 1 Definition A counter is a device which counts the number of input condition leading edges in sequence programs When the count value matches the set value the counter counts up and its contact turns ON The counter is of an up counting type 2 Count processing a When OUT C instruction is executed When and OUT Ci instruction is executed the following counter processing occurs coil ON OFF current value update count value 1 and contact ON OFF Counter current value update and contact ON OFF processing are not performed at END processing Ladder example x100 K10 lt co Processing at OUT CO Instruction X100 OFF to ON END OUT CO END Sequence program Processing content Coil ON OFF Current value update Contact ON OFF Diagram 9 25 Execution and processing of OUT C instruction 9 24 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 9 Counter C Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES erie b Curren
127. OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOS 9 34 95 Constants eeeceecccccoooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 35 9 5 1 Decimal constant K COC COO OOOO COOOL OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOO OOO OOOOOSOOO OOO OOOO OO OOS 9 35 9 5 2 Hexadecimal constant H COC OO COOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOO 9 35 CHAPTER10 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME 10 1to 10 7 10 1 Scan Time COCCOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO SOLOS OO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOS 10 a 1 10 1 1 Structure and calculation of scan time SOHOSOH SOS SH SHS SH SH SHH OH OHOHHOHOHHOHOSOHHSSOHSHOHHSSHSHOOHOOOHOOOOOOD 10 1 10 1 2 Time required for each processing included in scan tiME eeeeeeeeecececccccccccscccsocccccsoccsoceee 10 3 10 1 3 Factors that increase the scan time SOOHOHOSHSOHHSSSHOSHSOHHSSHSHH SH SH HSH HH HHHHHHHOHHOHHOHOHHHHOHOHSOHOOOOSOS 10 6 10 2 Other Processing Times COCO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOOH SOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOOS 10 7 CHAPTER11 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE 11 1to11 4 11 1 Items to be examined for program Creation seccccccccoooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 11 1 1 1 2 Procedure for writing progra
128. OR intelligent function module occurrence CPU module Continued to the next page p 2 oO g o 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 29 6 FUNCTIONS Detailed item Table 6 11 Self diagnostics list continued Diagnostics description Diagnostics Error occurring when error is detected MELSECIEN rics Diagnostics subject timing At power ON At reset When accessing 1401 46 Module state during Checks that the CC Link Safety master module to intelligent INTELLIGENT FUNCTION operation and network module operate normally function module MODULE DOWN e During execution of the END 1403 instruction At power ON 1411 Checks that communication with the At reset 47 Communication route with intelligent function module is performed Always 1413 CONTROL BUS ERROR intelligent function module normally During execution Checks that the base unit operates normally of the END 1414 1415 instruction Checks that input power supply is supplied 18 Input power supply to normally to the power supply module Always 4500 AC DC DOWN power supply module Checks that no momentary power failure occurs in the input power supply Checks that the voltage of the battery installed W Battery to the CPU module satisfies the standard value Always 1600 BATTERY ERROR Checks that the ROM writ t is within th et EXCEED MAX FLASH ROM ecks that
129. OWN NdI 9 WeIBOlY BUNA 104 INp201d s pu ddy xepu O O O O O Q O O O O O O x x x O x x Q O O x x x x x x O O x x x x x x O AO AO A1 A2 B2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A4 A4 A4 B4 A5 A6 A6 A7 A8 A9 B9 A9 A9 A10 A10 A11 A12 B12 A12 A12 GXD1 GOT GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GXD1 GOT GXD1 GXD1 GXW2 A7 GXW2 A7 GXW2 A7 GXW2 A7 GOT GXW2 B7 GXW2 B7 GOT GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT GXD1 GXD1 GXW2 A11 GXW2 A11 GXW2 A11 GXW2 A11 GOT GXW2 B11 GXW2 B11 GXD1 GXD1 G4 GOT App 51 Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELS AG Qs ie O Available A Available by setting the routing parameter to the QCPU or remote station shown in the parentheses x Not available For GOT accessible to the safety CPU module refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual App 52 Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELEGEN res
130. Program execution order AG QS ie 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES erie 3 1 Sequence Program A sequence program is created using the sequence instructions basic instructions a n x 7 c application instructions etc 8 Sequence instruction X100 MO K100 k kio A X140 T Basic instruction Performance Specification BIN K4X120 DO Application instruction oO X141 WAND DO D1 D2 Diagram 3 2 Sequence program Refer to the following manual for the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions lt gt QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 3 e ous ong E Sco ao0 OBC on c52 EE eco GEQ D O X now 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 1 Sequence Program oO N 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSECIEN rics 3 1 1 Sequence program description method The sequence program is created with the ladder mode of GX Developer The ladder mode is based on the concept of a sequence circuit of relay control It enables programming in representation close to a sequence circuit In the ladder mode programming is performed in ladder block units A ladder block is the minimum unit for performing sequence program operation which starts fro
131. RAM EXECUTION 3 1to3 18 3 1 Sequence Program cooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 2 3 1 1 Sequence program description method ssesccccccocooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 3 3 1 2 Sequence program operation 0ooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 4 3 2 Concept of Scan Time 0ooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 5 3 3 Operation Processing ooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 7 3 3 1 Initial processinge eeeeeeseescececeecccoceccecccccccccccoccococoococcccccocccccceccococcocoocooooceccccceceseeee 3 7 3 3 2 O refresh 0ooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 8 3 3 3 END processing eeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseseseeesesesecesececececoecococosoosococoesesesesesesesesecececsesesesse3 B 3 4 RUN STOP Operation Processinge eeeeeeeeesesesesesesescecececocececececoococosocooooosososesosesesesesesee3 O 3 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure eeeeseeeeseseesessesescesecceseecosecceseccesosoee 3 11 3 6 Data Clear Processing eeeeeeeeeeesesesesesesesecececcsoecccoceceoececcccecoooeososoosscsoscsosesesesesesesesee 3 12 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programseesessssesescesescccescccososcccosescscososes 3
132. S Number Name Meaning Explanation Nhan AR ae ma p Cancel the I O interlock of safety station by changing the bit of 8 0 I O interlock register from 0 to 1 a of safety Safety station station on CC b15 b14 to b1 bO interlock Link Safet sD1076 y cancel request not released SD1076 16 15 to 2 1 2 to 3 3 U Request 5 D1079 CC Link 1 I O interlock SD1077 32 31 to 18 17 8 Safety master of safety module 1 station on CC D1078 48 ae Sy 34 33 A Link Safety SD1079 64 63 to 50 49 3 released 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers OE The specified status of safety remote station is stored 0 is stored for the standard remote station Safety remote 0 No safety b15 b14 to b1 bO tation remote station 23 D1200 2B specification specification SD1200 16 15 to 2 1 P e to S Initial Sa D1203 CC Link 1 Safety remote SD1201 32 31 to 18 17 o Safet t tati ve Dee eet DRON sp1202 48 47 to 34 33 ce module 2 specification 36 D1203 64 63 to 50 49 388 ca 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 0 Normal The refresh communication status of safety remote station is communicatio stored Safety refresh i Fani 0 is stored for the standard remote station communication ak status of each f b15 b14 to b1 b0 i D1204 station D safety remote SD1204 16 15 to 2 1 S Status QS 2 to standard 3 station CC r change o SD1207 Link remote station SD1205 32 31 to 18 17 3 on CC Link lt
133. SCII code 3 characters al e SD14 SD12 NGL SoD SD13 Empt 5D14 Empty SD15 SD15 x oO g Remark eeeeeeecseeeoeeoeaoeeeoeeeoeevseeaoeaeeeoeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeoeeo ee ee 8 3 Extensions are shown in TableApp 11 TableApp 11 Extension name Extension File type 51H 50H 41H QPA Parameters 51H 50H 47H QPG Sequence program 51H 43H 44H QCD Device comment eeeeeea esceosceaeeoeoeoeseeaee eceoeseeseee eceoeoeoeeeaceaeeceaeeseeeaese eaceeeaea ee ee Appendix 2 Special Register List App 9 APPENDICES Number SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 App 10 Error common information Meaning Error common information TableApp 10 Special register Explanation 3 Time value set Number Meaning SD5 Time 14s units 0 to 9994s SD6 Time 1ms units 0 to 65535ms SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Empty SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 4 Program error location Number Meaning SD5 SD6 File name SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD9 Extension 3 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Empty SD12 Block No 4 SD13 Step No 4 SD14 Sequence step No L SD15 Sequence step No H 4 0 is stored to the block number and the step number 9 CC Link Safety information Number Mea
134. SD62 to 79 when the special relay SM62 switches ON Example The program which outputs the No of the ON annunciator F5 Fault detection program X100 X102 B SET F5 m H tak ae SM62 OFF to ON SD62 OtoS SM62 SD63 Oto 1 BCDP SD62 K4X120H sD64 Oto5 SD65 0 Output of annunciator ro No which switched ON sp79 o Annunciator ON detection Diagram 9 10 Detection and storage of annunciator ON 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 9 9 2 4 Annunciator F Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 10 MELSEC LES erie 4 Number of used N O and NIC contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts NC contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceeded 5 Annunciator ON procedure a Annunciator ON procedure The annunciator can be turned ON by either of the following instructions 1 SET Fi instruction The SET F instruction turns ON the annunciator only on the leading edge OFF to ON of the input condition If the input condition turns OFF the annunciator is held ON The scan time can be reduced by using many annuciators compared with the OUT Fi instruction 2 OUT Fi instruction The annunciator can be turned ON OFF by the OUT F instruction but it takes longer time than the SET F instruction since it performs processing every scan If the annunciator is turned OFF by the OUT F instruction the RST FE instruction must b
135. Scan Set Time gt Sequence Program maximum Scan Time If the sequence program scan time is longer than the constant scan setting time the CPU module detects PROGRAM SCAN TIME OVER error code 5010 In this case the constant scan setting is ignored and the sequence program is executed based on its scan time Performance Specification Constant scan setting Constant 0 12 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4ms scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 Sequence j j jm rogram prog 3 5ms AR 0 5ms B 3 5ms A 3 4ms _ 0 6ms 4ms Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 5 3ms 4ms Scan where the constant scan is not normal Diagram 6 17 Operation when the Scan Time is longer than the Constant Scan setting time If the sequence program scan time is longer than the WDT setting time the CPU module detects a WDT error In this case the program execution is stopped 1 0 Nunber Assignment 4 Waiting time from when END processing is executed until next scan starts Sequence program processing is stopped during the waiting time from when the END processing of a sequence program is executed until the next scan starts Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files 5 Constant scan accuracy Refer to CHAPTER 10 for the constant scan accuracy a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 9 Constant scan 6 41
136. U measures the time even if the power fails module using a battery mounted on the CPU module Therefore if the CPU module s battery capacity falls the clock data value may become inaccurate When the programmable controller power on or the CPU module reset is canceled the CPU module checks if the clock data value is within the range shown in this Section 3 If the clock data value is incorrect the clock data value is initialized to January 1 2005 00 00 00 At this time the CPU module records OP004 SYSTEM INITIALIZE SYSTEM CLOCK in the operation error history The time recorded in the operation error history is the value of the clock data after the clock data was initialized Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 2 6 Accuracy of Clock Data F lt The accuracy of the clock function differs with the ambient temperature as shown 3 below 2 Q Table6 17 Accuracy of clock data k Ambient Temperature C Accuracy Day difference S g 8 0 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 14 z 25 3 18 to 5 29 TYP 2 07 Be 55 12 97 to 3 63 TYP 3 16 Ep 2 E a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 11 Clock Function 6 47 6 FUNCTIONS 6 48 MELSEC LES erie 6 12 Remote Operation 6 12 1 Remote operation changes the operating status of the CPU module by the operation performed from outside e g GX
137. UTION MELSEC LES erie 3 4 RUN STOP Operation Processing CPU module has two types of operation status RUN and STOP status CPU module operation processing is explained below 1 2 RUN Status Operation Processing RUN status indicate that the sequence program operation is performed from step 0 to END instruction to step 0 repeatedly a Output status when changing into RUN status When changing into the RUN status the CPU module either outputs the output Y status saved in the STOP status or outputs the operation result after one scan depending on the STOP RUN time output mode setting of the parameter dialog box L gt Section 6 10 b Processing time before operation start The processing time taken from switching STOP to RUN until the operation start of the sequence program varies with the system configuration and parameter settings Normally 0 1 s STOP Status Operation Processing The STOP status means that the sequence program operation is stopped by the RUN STOP RESET switch or the remote STOP function gt Section 6 12 1 The CPU module is also placed in the STOP status when a stop error occurs a Output status when changing into STOP status When changing into the STOP status the CPU module saves the output Y status and turns all output points OFF The device memory of other than the output Y is retained 3 4 RUN STOP Operation Processing 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION 3 CPU module
138. ZE OPE ERROR LOG is stored in the operation error history 6 38 6 8 Recording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error history function 6 FUNCTIONS MELEGEN erie 6 9 Constant scan 1 Definition of Constant Scan The scan time differs because the processing time differs depending on whether the instruction which is used in the sequence program is executed or not Constant scan is a function to execute the sequence program repeatedly while maintaining the scan time at a constant time Overview 2 Applications of constant scan I O refresh is performed before sequence program execution Using the constant scan function the I O refresh intervals can be made constant if the sequence program execution time varies Performance Specification Scan time when constant scan is not used Sequence program END processing END y 0 END 0 gt Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions Sequence program END processing I O Nunber Assignment od Waiting time 7 5ms 2ms 7ms Diagram 6 15 Constant scan operation Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 9 Constant scan 6 39 6 FUNCTIONS 6 40 3 Setting the constant scanning time The constant scanning time is set at the PLC RAS
139. a mode for maintenance This mode enables the write operation from a programming tool and the device test operation to debug or maintain the sequence program Enriched operation history and error history The CPU module can record a total of 3000 details of the CPU module operation by the user and errors occurred in the CPU module CC Link Safety or CC Link IE Field Network as operation error history data Recording the details of the CPU module operation by the user into the operation error history clarifies the occurrence order of operations and errors Troubleshooting becomes easier by confirming the operation error history The contents recorded in the operation error history are shown in Table1 2 Table1 2 Recorded contents of operation error history Information Contents History Information per Entry Operation code User s operations for the CPU module are Operation Operation message stored as a history history h Operation execution date Operations which change the CPU module information e Result code status are recorded Operation attached information Error history Hardware error information Error detected by CC Link Safety A Error code The following errors are stored as a history e Error message Error failure detected by self diagnostics e Occurrence date e Error information category common j information individual information e Error detected by CC Link IE F
140. a terminal block mounting screw terminal screw and module mounting screw within the specified torque range If the terminal block mounting screw or terminal screw is too loose it may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the screw or module a short circuit or malfunctions If the module mounting screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening the screw may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Startup and Maintenance precautions CAUTION The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running safety programmable controller Program change when a safety CPU module is RUN device test and operating status change such as RUN STOP switching have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured Following the operating procedure predetermined at designing the operation has to be performed by an instructed person When changing a program while a safety CPU module is RUN Write during RUN it may cause a program breakdown in some operating conditions Fully understand the precautions described in the GX Developer s manual before use Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause a failure erroneous operation injury or fire If the product is repaired or remodeled by other than the specified FA centers or us the warranty is
141. ables the CPU module to check for failures O O Section 6 7 Records the operations that have been executed to the Operation error history CPU module from the outside and the self diagnostics Q O Section 6 8 errors that have occurred in the CPU module in the past Constant scan Executes the program at a constant frequency O Oo Section 6 9 Output status selection function for Selects the output Y status output before STOP output Section i transition from STOP status to RUN after the calculation execution when the CPU module is O Oo 6 10 status set from STOP status to RUN status Section Clock function Executes the CPU module internal clock O Oo 6 11 i Section Remote RUN STOP Stops and starts operating the CPU module Oo O 6 12 1 Resets the CPU module when the CPU module is in a Section Remote RESET O O STOP status 6 12 2 P 5 Monitors the status of programs and devices on the Section Monitoring function O Oo CPU module by operating from the GX Developer 6 13 Writes programs when the CPU module is in the RUN Section Online change x O status 6 14 Monitors operational delays caused by CPU module s Section Watchdog timer O O hardware and program errors 6 15 Section Remote password Prevents an illegal access using the Ethernet module Oo 6 16 A Connects to the GX Developer and monitors system Section System display h O O configuration 6 17 Enables the front mounted LEDs to indicate the Section LED display fee O O operat
142. afety communications Safety remote station S Status to status CC Link with safety detection error chang SD1071 Safety master remote stationis 8310 The safety communications Product information 9 module 1 stored mismatch 8320 The safety communications Initial monitor timeout 8321 The safety communications Safety monitor timeout 8322 The safety communications Error monitor timeout 8330 The safety communications Command error 8331 The safety communications Data split number error 8332 The safety communications Link ID error 8333 The safety communications Running number error 8334 The safety communications Received data error Bit corresponding to the station number turns 1 when the master station goes to the interlock status after the error was detected at the master station Safety station D1072 interlock 0 Interlock is b15 b14 to b1 bO to status not executed SD1072 16 15 to 2 1 S Status CC Link 1 During change SD1075 Safety master interlock SD1073 32 31 to 18 17 module 1 SD1074 48 47 to 34 33 SD1075 64 63 to 50 49 App 20 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Appendix 2 Special Register List CPU QS APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie TableApp 17 Special register z 2 Set b Cc di
143. am 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 5 Edge relay V Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em 9 2 6 Link relay B 1 Definition Link relay is a CPU module side relay used when refreshing the link relay LB data of the CC Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module to the CPU module or when refreshing the CPU module data to the link relays LB of the CC c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 gt o a Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module 2 3 CC Link IE Controller CPU module Network module 2 Link relay Link relay BO LBO 5E Link refresh Link refresh setting range K 28 ZS a Ss oO Ore 35 aa g Diagram 9 15 Link refresh z 2 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program No restrictions on the quantity used S BO switches ON at X100 OFF to ON i SET BO The link relay BO ON can only be used for internal CPU module processing and cannot be K20 output externally lt To BO ON OFF information is output from the CC Link Safety remote I O unit to an external destination X102 BO y lt B100 0 Diagram 9 16 Link Relay 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 15 9 2 6 Link relay B Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES erie 3 Using link relays in the network system
144. and CPU module processing time 10 1 1 Structure and calculation of scan time 1 Scan time structure The CPU module scan time consists of the following processings The CPU module performs the following processings cyclically in the RUN status Processing in RUN status Program check I O refresh ti refresh time VO refresh gt Section10 1 2 1 Program execution Is program terminated 1 YES Instruction execution time S gt Section10 1 2 2 Various function compatibility oe processing 2 gt Section10 1 2 3 y Service processing time Service processing LEF Section10 1 2 4 CC Link IE Field Network Scan time CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H refresh Mod le refresh time x ILF Section10 1 2 5 CC Link Safety refresh v Constant wait processing No processing performed when not set WDT reset scan time calculation Common processing time ZF Section10 1 2 6 Operation status identification y RUN status Hardware and system information check update STOP status STOP processing 1 Program end indicates the timing when the END S QS ABORT instruction is executed 2 Indicates a calendar update or error clear Diagram 10 1 Scan time structure Safety CPU 10 1 10 1 Scan Time 10 1 1 Structure and calculation of scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROC
145. as devices and instructions convenient for program creation The main devices and instructions are outlined below 1 Flexible device designation CPU modules allow devices to be specified flexibly a Word device bits are handled as contacts coils By specifying the bit of the word device each bit of the word device can be handled as a contact coil Word device bit designation Turns ON X100 K 1 Bit 5 b5 of DO c sT DO 5 depending on 1 0 of Bit 5 b5 in DO DO 5 SET Y100 Diagram 1 9 Designation of word device bit b Input need not be pulsed by use of differential contact An input need not be pulsed by use of a differential contact tH WF Differential contact ON at leading Y100 edge of X100 Diagram 1 10 Use of differential contact 1 3 Devices and Instructions Convenient for Programming MELSEC LES erie Word device bit designation Turns ON OFF MO e x100 X102 X100 E MHH Y100 lt PLS Y100 MO X102 4 Y100 1 9 Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES res 1 4 How to Check the Serial No and Function Version The serial No and function version of the CPU module can be checked on the rating plate or in
146. aster local module CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions 2 with safety functions 2 GX Developer Version 8 40S or later 1 CC Link Safety CC Link Safety e ee aes stop Light curtain e Emergency stop Light curtain Standard remote SCC OCCIE device station Link satety Link Safety Standard remote I O remote I O station remote I O station station Emergency stop Safety relay switch Figure 1 1 Safety programmable controller system 1 The available functions vary depending on the versions For details refer to Appendix 9 2 For details on the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions refer to the following manual gt MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 1 2 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW 2 MELEGEN res The safety CPU operation mode is equipped for safe system operation The CPU module is equipped with two safety CPU operation modes SAFETY MODE for safe system operation and TEST MODE for system construction and maintenance These two modes prevent the user s erroneous operations for safe system operation a SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE is a mode for safe system operation This mode prohibits the write operation from a programming tool and the device test operation during the system operation b TEST MODE TEST MODE is
147. ation with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 2 Program File Structure 5 14 D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSECIEN res 2 Display of program capacity by GX Developer During programming by GX Developer the program capacity sum of the file header capacity and the numbers of steps in the created program is displayed in terms of the number of steps as shown in Diagram 5 10 When a program is created the capacity of the created program can be confirmed Program capacity display iP MELSOFT series GX Developer C MELSEC QSOO1CPU LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help Dost S 4 8 Q Rl 4 8 Ble Program Bi Bf zE dt 4b 4 E OS F 1 SS X H AE TH Ye Tt a a alee F5 sF5 F6 sF6 F F8 F9 sF9 cF9 cFIO sF sF8 aF aF8 aF5 caF5 cafl0 F10 aF9 Diagram 5 10 Program capacity display 4 POINT 1 The program capacity displayed during programming by GX Developer is the capacity of the file header and execution program and does not include the capacity of the allocate memory for online change 500 steps Example The capacity of the program having the execution program area of 491 steps is displayed on GX Developer as shown below The file header default is 34 steps File header Jas steps Execution program je
148. cal module with safety functions enables safety communication between safety CPUs In addition safety communication and standard communication can be used on the same network Therefore a safety programmable controller to be added on a system constructed in the existing CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network master local module CC Link IE Field Network master local Standard module with safety functions communication Standard communication Safety communication Diagram 1 5 Safety communication using the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions 8 Safety Standards Use the product according to the following safety standards Table1 4 Safety Standards Region Safety Standards IEC61508 Parts 1 7 1998 2000 1S013849 1 2006 International IEC61131 2 2007 IEC61000 6 2 2005 IEC61000 6 4 2006 IEC61784 3 2010 IEC60204 1 2006 EN954 1 1996 EN 1S013849 1 2008 EN61131 2 2007 EOR EN61000 6 2 2005 EN61000 6 4 2007 North America UL508 NFPA79 2007 1 6 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Program Storage and Operation 1 Program storage a Storage of program created by GX Developer The program created by GX Developer can be stored into the program memory or standard ROM of the CPU module Program memory Parameter Program Device comment Ne J Standard ROM t Parameter Program Devi
149. ccc ccc cc ccc ccc cece cecce ccc eecececcocccoeccceccccocooooocoe 5 18 6 1 to 6 66 6 1 Function List 0ooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode coooooooooooooooooooooooo0oo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 Safety CPU operation Mode s eeeeseeseseeeeeeececcocceceoeooocccccocceoccccecoocooooccceseososcecocoesooe b 2 Checking safety CPU operation Mode seeeeeeeseseeeeecesesoseecceoeoscocecocooooocecocoeoooscceeoeoooe G 5 Safety CPU operation mode switchinge eeeeeeeeeeseeseeeceeceeceoceoceeceeccoccocceoceccecceeceeccoseeee G 8 Operation of each function in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status 6 14 Online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Developer eeeseseeeeees 6 16 6 3 CPU access paSsworde eseeesesessseseeceesssseccceceossoeccocooosssccccooossssccccesssssccccesosssssccesosossoe G 18 6 4 PLC memory initialization s seseseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeococccososccoseseceseccsosccccccceceoececoeosossssososssssssee G 21 6 5 Setting to prevent continuous RUN in TEST MODE sseeeeeeesesesececececsececeecsocsoossssscseseseeesee G 25 6 6 Checking the ROM write Counteseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeesesecesecosecececcecececccoceceoececoecososososssosesesesesee G 27 6 7 Self diagnostics Functione essccccccoccooo000000000000000000000000000000000
150. ce module MELSECNET H module Ethernet module Generic term for the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master Intelligent function module local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module and Ethernet module Generic term for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety Network module functions CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module and Ethernet module Battery Abbreviation for the Q6BAT type battery Blank cover Abbreviation for the QG60 type blank cover A 21 Generic Term Abbreviation Description GOT Generic term for the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT A series GOT F series and GOT1000 series A 22 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES ries CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the programs I O number assignment method functions and devices of the QS Series CPU Modules QS001CPU Overview For the power supply modules base units and batteries refer to the manual below L gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 List of QS Series CPU Module manuals SE The QS series CPU module manuals are as shown below 5 P 5 E o For details such as manual numbers refer to ABOUT MANUALS in this manual ao Table1 1 List of manuals of QS Series CPU module 2 FE oe A 2 Maintenance Program Common 8 g S and Fundame
151. ce comment 1 The standard ROM is used to ROM the program memory b Program execution Program memory Parameter Device comments CPU module Execution of program in program memory For program comment display by GX Developer Diagram 1 7 Execution of stored program AG Qs es Diagram 1 6 Memory configuration and storage destinations 1 2 Program Storage and Operation The CPU module operates the program stored in the program memory Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES erie c Execution of program stored in standard ROM Programs and data can also be stored into the standard ROM The programs stored in the standard ROM can be booted read to the program memory and executed when the programmable controller is powered ON or the CPU module is reset Execution of program booted from the standard ROM to the program memory Program memory x Bich t o0 i G s a Ni Device Standard ROM comment Diagram 1 8 Boot run 1 2 Program Storage and Operation 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 Devices and Instructions Convenient for Programming The CPU module h
152. d from GX developer 2 e PLC memory initialization 2 2 Atthe factory the OS etc are written to the ROM of the safety CPU module Therefore the ROM write count is increased by the number of ROM writes at the factory a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 6 Checking the ROM write count 6 27 6 FUNCTIONS 6 28 MELSEC LES erie 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 1 2 3 4 5 What the self diagnostics function is The self diagnostics function diagnoses presence or absence of an error in the CPU module by itself The objectives of the self diagnostics function are the prevention of malfunction of the CPU module and preventive maintenance Self diagnostics timing If an error occurs when the CPU module is power on or while the CPU module is running the self diagnostics function detects and displays the error and executes the CPU module operations stop etc Checking an error a LED lit When the CPU module detects an error it lights up the ERR LED b The storage destination and checking of the error definition If the CPU module detects an error it turns ON special relays SMO and SM1 and stores the error definition error code in a special register SDO If the CPU module detects multiple errors it stores the error code of the latest error into SDO Use the special relay and the special register in a program to establish
153. dule processing time 7 Chapter 11 Describes the procedure for writing parameters and programs created at the GX Developer to the CPU module This manual does not explain the functions of power supply modules base units extension cables memory cards and batteries of CPU module For these details refer to the manual shown below C7 QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QS series CPU modules Generic Term Abbreviation Description Generic term for safety CPU module safety power supply module safety main base Safety programmable controller unit CC Link safety master module CC Link safety remote I O module and CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions Generic term of each module for MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA Standard programmable controller series MELSEC A series and MELSEC FX series Used for distinction from safety programmable controller QS series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi safety programmable controller MELSEC QS series QS001CPU Abbreviation for the QS001CPU type safety CPU module CPU module Other name for the QS001CPU General product name for the models SW8D5C GPPW E SW8D5C GPPW EA GX Developer SW8D5C GPPW EV and SW8D5C GPPW EVA GX Works2 Another product name for the MELSEC programmabl
154. e Upgrade Co a et ee AD 53 INDEX INDEX 1 to INDEX 2 A 13 Related manual 5 QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CONTENTS CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Precautions for system configuration 2 2 Configuration of Peripheral Devices 2 3 Confirming Serial No and Function Version CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER4 CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specifications 4 2 Part Names 4 3 Switch Operation after Writing a Program 4 4 Reset Operation CHAPTERS POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specifications 5 2 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply 5 3 Names of Parts and Settings CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT 6 1 Specification 6 2 Part Names CHAPTER7 BATTERY 7 1 Battery Q6BAT 7 1 1 Battery Specifications 7 1 2 Installation of Battery CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START UP PROCEDURES 8 1 Procedure before Operating in the SAFETY MODE CHAPTERS EMC LOW VOLTAGE AND MACHINERY DIRECTIVES 9 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 9 1 1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive 9 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive 9 1 3 Cables 9 1 4 Power Supply Module 9 1 5 Others 9 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive 9 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC QS series programmable controller 9 2 2 MELSEC QS series programmable controller selection 9 2 3 Power supp
155. e controller software package Programming tool Generic term for GX Developer and GX Works2 QS034B Abbreviation for the QS034B type safety main base unit Base unit Other name for the QS034B QS061P Abbreviation for the QS061P A1 and QS061P A2 type safety power supply modules Power supply module Other name for the QS061P QS0J61BT12 Abbreviation for the QS0J61BT12 type CC Link Safety system master module CC Link Safety Abbreviation for the CC Link Safety system CC Link Safety master module Other name for the QS061BT12 QSO0J65BTS2 8D Abbreviation for the QSOJ65BTS2 8D CC Link Safety system remote I O module QSOJ65BTS2 4T Abbreviation for the QSQOJ65BTS2 4T CC Link Safety system remote I O module QSOJ65BTB2 12DT Abbreviation for the QSOJ65BTB2 12DT type CC Link Safety system remote I O module CC Link Safety remote I O dul Generic term for the QSOJ65BTS2 8D QSOJ65BTS2 4T QSOJ65BTB2 12DT module CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety Abbreviation for the MELSEC QS series CC Link IE Field Network master local module functions CC Link IE Controller Network Abbreviation for the QU71GP21 SX and QJ71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network module module MELSECNET H Abbreviation for the MELSECNET H network system Abbreviation for the QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21G QJ71BR11 MELSECNET H network module Ethernet Abbreviation for the Ethernet network system Abbreviation for the QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 QU71E71 B2 Ethernet interfa
156. e current value is not updated Program example xa H K8 To Current value update timing OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing Program i 1 i i 1 1 1 1 ON SE p o _ i External input OFF te 4 pot eS feu to X0 Pe ee Fe ee ee ee ON i i i i i cpu moduls OFF f oio foio o opo pgo fd X0 i i i i i i i i i i i i iON i i i i i i i i Coil of TO OFF j o TE Lo a a P go wooo Contact of TO OFF 1 2114 2 3 141 2 14 2 3 Tibi 2 3 10ms counting Haaa i D i 7 i D iY i D Na 1 ml 1 N 1 Ly 1 N 1 X Count with END i 2 3 2 3 2 3 instruction See E S E a e ad Bo i N N MA Do i 1 LS La a a i Current value i 2 2 2 3 5 5 2 7 7 3 10 of TO dt Accuracy from timer coil on to contact on 1 scan time timer limit setting to 1 scan time gt On timing for coil of the timer gt Input reading timing Diagram 9 22 Timer accuracy For 10ms The timer response accuracy from when reading input X until when outputting it is 2 scan time timer time limit setting 9 22 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSECIEN res 8 Precautions for using timers The following are a few precautions regarding timer use c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a
157. e executed For these reasons use the SET F instruction to turn ON the annunciator x POINT If switched ON by any method other than the SET F and OUT F instructions the annunciator functions in the same way as the internal relay Does not switch ON at SM62 and annunciator Nos are not stored at SD62 SD64 to 79 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 4 Annunciator F Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em b Processing at annunciator ON 1 Data stored at special registers SD62 to 79 Nos of annunciators which switched ON are stored in order at SD64 to 79 e The annunciator No which was stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 e 1 is added to the SD63 value c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a SETF50 SETF25 SET F1023 8 in aa a E sD62 0 50 50 50 3 Sp63 __o gt gt ie gt 3 2 spe4 __o gt 50 50 50 SE SD65 0 o0 25 25 SD66 0 o gt 1023 Up to 16 annunciator 2 SD67 0 0 O No can be stored 23 i i i i i i i i z sp79 0 0 0 0 SS Diagram 9 11 Processing at annunciator ON 3 a oD l T 2 Processing at CPU The USER LED on the module front turns ON g 5 a f E 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 11 9 2 4 Annunciator F Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES erie 6 Annunciator OFF procedure and processing content a Annunciator OFF procedure The annunciator can be turned OFF by any of
158. e or one year from date of Customer s purchase whichever is less Mitsubishi MELSEC Safety programmable logic controllers the Products will be free from defects in material and workmanship b At MELCO s option for those Products MELCO determines are not as warranted MELCO shall either repair or replace them or issue a credit or return the purchase price paid for them c For this warranty to apply 1 Customer shall give MELCO i notice of a warranty claim to MELCO and the authorized dealer or distributor from whom the Products were purchased ii the notice shall describe in reasonable details the warranty problem iii the notice shall be provided promptly and in no event later than thirty 30 days after the Customer knows or has reason to believe that Products are not as warranted and iv in any event the notice must given within the warranty period Customer shall cooperate with MELCO and MELCO s representatives in MELCO s investigation of the warranty claim including preserving evidence of the claim and its causes meaningfully responding to MELCO s questions and investigation of the problem grant MELCO access to witnesses personnel documents physical evidence and records concerning the warranty problem and allow MELCO to examine and test the Products in question offsite or at the premises where they are installed or used and 3 If MELCO requests Customer shall remove Products it claims are defective and ship them to MELCO or
159. e points for link special relays is 512 in the CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions CC Link IE Controller Network module and MELSECNET H module The link special relays can be assigned as shown below Safety CPU Link special relay SBO For 1st network module aa SB1FF peni SB200 For 2nd network module ae 1536 SB3FF points points SB400 B48 For 3rd network module points SB5FF A For details on the link special relay refer to the manual L gt The manual for each network module eeeeeaeeeeceoeoeecoceoseeaeaeeceoeseoeseeaeeceoeoeaeeeceaoeseeaoeaeeeaeseaeaeeeae ee ee 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 17 9 2 7 Link special relay SB c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 18 MELSECIEN res 9 2 8 Timer T 1 2 3 4 Definition A timer T is a device that starts counting when its coil turns ON and times out and turns ON its contact when the current value reaches or exceeds the set value The timer is of an up counting type The current value matches the set value when a time out occurs Timer types There are two types of timers a low high speed that allows the current value to return to 0 when a timer coil switches OFF and a retentive time
160. ecording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error history 6 35 es function 6 FUNCTIONS Classification Operation code EL SEC TM eres Table6 13 Operations stored in the operation error history Operation message Operation description Because the safety CPU operation mode is OP001 SYSTEM INITIALIZE OPERATION not retained correctly the CPU module MODE initialized the safety CPU operation mode in TEST MODE Because the program memory contents OP002 see EN INITIALIZE PROGRAM are not retained correctly the CPU module MEMORY formatted the program memory Because the operation error history SYSTEM INITIALIZE OPE ERROR contents are not retained correctly the OP003 ene System LOG operation error history was initialized into 0 incidents Because the system clock data is not OP004 SYSTEM INITIALIZE SYSTEM CLOCK correct the CPU module initialized the system clock data OP005 SYSTEM INITIALIZE PLC MEMORY MP CFU module executed the PLC memory initialization function Because the write to ROM information is OP006 SYSTEM INITIALIZE ROM WRITE INF not retained correctly the CPU module initialized the ROM information The CPU operation status of the CPU System CPU ore PA STEM SW TCR TO RUN module switched to the RUN state operation status The CPU operation status of the CPU OPOL SVS TEM SWIICHTOSTOF module switched to
161. ection 9 3 2 devices Nesting Nesting 15 points NO to 14 Decimal Unchangeable Section 9 4 Decimal constants K 2147483648 to 2147483647 Section 9 5 1 Constants Hexadecimal HO to FFFFFFFF Section 9 5 2 constants 1 For the timers retentive timers and counters their contacts and coils are bit devices and their current values are word devices 2 Can be changed in the PLC parameter dialog box of GX Developer Except the input output step relay link special relay and link special register gt Section 9 2 9 1 Device List 9 1 c B w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 2 Internal User Devices 1 Definition MELSEGCIEN res Internal user devices can be used for various user applications The number of usable points setting is designated in advance default value for internal user devices However this setting can be changed at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box QS Parameter Input relay Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Local start end start end dev start Local dev end Output relay mn x lt gt Data register Link register Z P o 4 A 4 lt 18 Link special Device total Word device Bit device 1536
162. ects in them consist of personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law If however the personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent provided by these terms then in any such event the disclaimer of and limitations on pecuniary or economic consequential and incidental damages shall nevertheless be enforceable to the fullest extent allowed by law f In no event shall any cause of action arising out of breach of warranty or otherwise concerning the Products be brought by Customer more than one year after the cause of action accrues g Each of the limitations on remedies and damages set forth in these terms is separate and independently enforceable notwithstanding the unenforceability or failure of essential purpose of any warranty undertaking damage limitation other provision of these terms or other terms comprising the contract of sale between Customer and MELCO 4 Delivery Force Majeure a Any delivery date for the Products acknowledged by MELCO is an estimated and not a promised date MELCO will make all reasonable efforts to meet the delivery schedule set forth in Customer s order or the purchase contract but shall not be liable for failure to do so b Produc
163. emote password set for the Ethernet module can be unlocked via Ethernet When the remote password is matched an access to the CPU module is enabled Performance Specification GX Developer unlocks the remote password to enable an access to the CPU module and then locks the remote password when the access line is closed 2 ELS Ethernet 25 Bee ago SOE cos Ethernet module SD3 Tag N O W z oO i 2 lt o Q c J The remote password is checked 3 The remote password is transferred to the Ethernet module at power ON or reset x 3 8 oS To Q gO o gt 2 a E gel OG Sr Diagram 6 30 Outline of remote password lock unlock processing performed for Ethernet module 5 Number of remote password set modules The number of remote password set modules is only one a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 16 Remote password 6 61 6 FUNCTIONS MELS AG Qs ie 6 Remote password setting changing and deleting procedures a Setting the remote password e In the Project data list tree of GX Developer select Parameter Remote password to display the Remote password setting screen Set the remote password Set the remote password Set the details JE Z7 FRE eee NAD NRA CE OE ex ERA MF AS az ELE NAFA HERE BAREO RE IP ERT ot Diagram 6 31 Remote password set
164. ence program 1342 4 x number of steps number of allocate memory for online change Device comment 80 sum of comment data sizes of devices e Comment data size of one device 10 10210xa 40x b e a Quotient of device points 256 e b Remainder of device points 256 Multi block online program change Value set at formatting 0 1 25K 2 5K 1 When the CC Link IE Controller Network module with a serial number first five digits of 14051 or earlier is set the capacity can be increased up to 326 2 134 is the default value It can be increased or decreased by parameter setting 5 17 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions 5 3 3 Memory capacities of files D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE 5 3 4 File size units MELSEC LES res 1 What is file size unit The minimum unit for writing a file to a memory area is called as a file size unit Overview The CPU module file size unit is 4 bytes Program memory Standard ROM Parameter Program Diagram 5 12 Program memory standard ROM file size units gt The area is secured in 4 byte unit gt The area is secured in 4 byte 1 step units Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 O Nunber Assignment ol 2 3 3 fe o Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x n 2 T ke oO n A fe E v
165. er this is performed by Online Remote operation Precautions a Remote RESET in RUN status Remote RESET cannot be performed when the CPU module is in RUN status Perform remote RESET after placing the CPU module in the STOP status by performing remote STOP or similar operation b Status after reset processing completion After the reset processing is complete the CPU module will enter operation status set by the RUN STOP RESET switch e With the RUN STOP RESET switch in the STOP position the CPU module enters into the STOP status e With the RUN STOP RESET switch in the RUN position the CPU module enters into the RUN status c When error occurs due to noise Take care that Remote RESET does not reset CPU module if an error occurs in the CPU module due to noise When the CPU module cannot be reset by the remote reset either reset with the RUN STOP RESET switch or restart up the programmable controller 6 12 Remote Operation 6 51 6 12 2 Remote RESET Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Intelligent Function Communication with Module Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS M LS aG lN POINT 1 If remote RESET is performed with the CPU module stopping due to an error note that the CPU module is placed in the operation status set by the RUN STOP
166. er Name Meaning Explanation inner a The specified status of safety remote station is stored 0 is stored for the standard remote station Safety remote 0 No safety b15 b14 to b1 bO tation remote station sSD1000 specification specification SD1000 16 15 to 2 1 e to A i S Initial D1003 CC Link 1 Safety remote SD1001 32 31 to 18 17 Safet t tati oi a sp1002 48 47 to 34 33 module 1 specification SD1003 64 63 to 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 0 Normal The refresh communication status of safety remote station is communicatio stored Safety refresh n reserved 0 is stored for the standard remote station ae station communication Unused sp1004 Status of each gon b15 b14 to b1 bo safety remote SD1004 16 15 to 2 1 S Status to z standard station CC changel D1007 Link remote station SD1005 32 31 to 18 17 on CC Link Safety master Safet SD1006 48 47 to 34 33 module 1 y 1 Safety station SD1007 64 63 to 50 49 communication error 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The status of communication with each safety remote station is stored SD1008 Station number 1 to SD1071 Station number 64 0 fixed in the case of standard remote station reserved station specified or without connection 0 At normal communication 10 At initial 20 During internal information access Safety station The status of 30 Link error D1008 communication communication 8300 The s
167. eration processing of the CPU module 3 3 1 Initial processing Initial processing is a preprocessing for execution of the sequence program operation When the programmable controller is power on or the CPU module reset is canceled the following processing is executed only once e System setting Boot from the standard ROM e Safety CPU operation mode setting e Self diagnostics e CC Link Safety network information setting e CC Link IE Field Network information setting e CC Link IE Controller Network information setting e MELSECNETHH information setting e Ethernet information setting e CPU operation status determination When the initial processing is completed the CPU module is placed in the operation status set by the RUN STOP RESET switch L gt Section 3 4 In SAFETY MODE booting is executed from the standard ROM regardless of the PLC parameter boot file settings In TEST MODE booting is executed from the standard ROM if booting from the standard ROM is set at the PLC parameter boot file setting x POINT 1 The CPU module s RUN STOP RESET switch is shown in the figure below RUN STOP RESET switch STOP RESET RUN 2 When a parameter or program has been changed in the STOP status reset the CPU with the RUN STOP RESET switch 3 3 Operation Processing 3 3 1 Initial processing 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES eres 3 3 2 I O refresh I O data between I
168. error CPU S Error identifier CPU A CPU B 0001H CPU A 0002H CPU B Error code to d SD50 Error reset An error code to be cleared is stored U 5 be cleared 9 All corresponding bits go 1 ON when battery voltage drops Bit pattern Subsequently these remain 1 ON even after battery voltage 2 Battery low indicating has been returned to normal 8 SD51 latch where b15 to b1 b0 S Error gt 2 battery voltage 0 J OF drop occurred CPU module battery error Bit pattern 2 indicating e Same configuration as SD51 above 23 SD52 Battery low where Turns to 0 OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal S Error 2 battery voltage thereafter B Q drop occurred cE Number of 3 gl umber o 7 p o 25 AC DOWN imes Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC power Eg SD53 of the rating during calculation of the CPU module the value S Error detecti for AC DOWN i a is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code detection I O modul I O modul iis Hi m ci The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module SD61 verify error verify error ays S Error verification error took place number module number sp62 Annunciator Annunciator The first annunciator number F number to be detected is S Instruction g number number stored here execution 3 Number of Number of S Instructi g SD63 cub pal T sm 7 R Stores the number of annunciators searched Ins je pet as g annunciators
169. es Set the CPU module to STOP Set the CPU module RUN STOP RESET switch to the STOP position 4 Display safety CPU operation mode screen The safety CPU operation mode screen is displayed with the following operations Online Safety CPU operation gt Switch operation mode Switch to safety CPU operation mode Current operation mode Safety CPU operation mode switching execution Click the switching Execution switch button MELSOFT series GX Developer D Switching to test mode Switch to operation mode Select Safety CPU operation mode switching execution Click the Yes button 1 Continued to the next page Diagram 6 6 SAFETY MODE to TEST MODE switching 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching 6 FUNCTIONS M LS 2G eX MELSOFT series GX Developer x Overview 1 Switch to test mode completed y Check the completion of the switch to TEST MODE Click the OK button Performance Specification Switch to safety CPU operation mode Current operation mode Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 5 E i 5 lt Completed S 3 Figure 6 6 SAFETY MODE to TEST MODE switching continued o pe o ce EQO o gt na amp g 25 a 2 D 3 U Intelligent Function Communica
170. es Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 3 14 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES erie 2 Numeric value output from CPU module to outside A digital display or similar device is available to externally display the numeric value operated by the CPU module a How to output numeric value The CPU module performs operation in BIN If binary values used in the CPU module are output as they are to a digital display they will not be displayed correctly Therefore the BCD instruction is used to convert the data operated in BIN into BCD used by the external display or similar device Using the BCD instruction allows the same display as in DEC decimal to be provided on the external display or similar device CPU module Numeric data designation H Bnp k4x100 Do Digital display sald Y13F to Y130 A i fc D5 aa BCD output BIN data Diagram 3 10 Display of CPU module operation data by digital display Refer to the following manual for details of the BCD instruction QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 3 15 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES eres 3 7 1 BIN Binary Code 1 Binary code Binary date is represented by 0 OFF and 1 ON Decimal n
171. es0 G 53 6 1 3 Monitor Function 0000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 54 6 14 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN COCCOO OOOOH SOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OO OOOOH OOOOH OOOOH OOOOOOO 6 55 6 14 1 Online change in ladder MOdE eocc0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 55 6 1 5 Watchdog Timer WDT COC COO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOS 6 58 6 1 6 Remote passworde eeeseseeccececcececocccccocococccococccococccccococcocococococococccocososocococccocseeooooooo 6 60 6 17 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer C0000000 OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOE 6 64 6 1 8 LED Display COCCOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO SOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OO OOOO OOO COOOOE 6 66 6 18 1 Method to turn off the LED COC OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OO OOO OOOOO OOS 6 66 CHAPTER7 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE 7 1to7 3 7 1 Communication with CC Link Safety Master Module seeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessseosseseceoeooscecececeseseceoeoee 7 1 7 2 Communication with CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module With Safety Functions 7 1 7 3 Communication with CC Link IE Controller Network Module or MELSECNET H Module seeseeseeee27 2
172. esolved cancel the error by operating the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 Only for the operation continue errors A O Valid x Invalid 1 Special relay and special register contents SM50 When switch from OFF to ON the error is canceled for the error code stored in the SD50 SD50 The error code for the error to be canceled is stored Refer to the following manual for the error codes L gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 6 66 6 18 LED Display 6 18 1 Method to turn off the LED COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC LES res CHAPTER7 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE Overview 7 1 Communication with CC Link Safety Master Module Communication between a CPU module and the CC Link Safety master module is performed by auto refresh To execute link refresh the refresh parameters need to be set on the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting of the network parameter in GX Developer For details on the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting items refer to Section 8 2 Performance Specification For details on the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting items of the network parameter refer to the following manual L gt CC Link Safety System Master Module User s Manual Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 3 7 2 Communication with CC Link IE Field Network Master Local a Module With Safety Functions Q Communicatio
173. etion device of each instruction tuning ON Precautions a Changing the operation status before the completion device turns ON f the operation status of the CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP before the completion device turns ON after an intelligent function module dedicated instruction execution the completion device turns ON after the status is switched to RUN again and the operation is performed for one scan b Supported instructions For instructions supported in the safety CPU module refer to Appendix 7 For details on intelligent function module dedicated instructions and completion devices refer to the manual of an intelligent function module used eeeoseeeeeevoeeceeseoevoeoeeeeoeeeeoeeeoeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeveecevoe eee e eee 7 5 Communication using intelligent function module dedicated instructions T 3 Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions bas S e Emo aes se T a oO ot ECE J3 Q ES HE 62 OE 2 J 3 fo Parameters 8 PARAMETERS MELSEC LES erie CHAPTER8 PARAMETERS This chapter explains the parameters need to be set when the programmable controller system is configured 1 Parameter types There are three types of parameters for the CPU module PLC parameters gt Section 8 1 This parameter is set when the prog
174. ets the At t 3102 3103 ERROR 24 Parameter setting specifications Tese 3104 Checks that the setting in CC Link Safety At power ON 3105 3106 CC LINK PARAMETER parameter meets the specifications At reset 3107 ERROR Checks that the setting in CC Link IE Field NETWORK PARAMETER Network master local module with safety ys ene on 3100 3191 ERROR functions parameter meets the specifications reek 3150 DUPLICAT NET NO Checks that the setting of Remote password At power ON 3400 3401 REMOTE PASSWORD 6 30 meets the specifications 6 7 Self diagnostics Function At reset ERROR Continued to the next page 6 FUNCTIONS Detailed item Diagnostics subject AG Qs ie Table 6 11 Self diagnostics list continued Diagnostics description Diagnostics timing Error occurring when error is detected Error code Error message Checks that the start I O number or network sDuring xec n INTELLIGENT FUNCTION number specified by the intelligent function of the instruction 2112 MODULE ERR module dedicated instruction is correct At power ON Checks that the instruction code in the program sAtteset i correct lis noficoirupied At status change 4000 INSTRUCTION CODE ERROR from STOP to RUN At power ON Checks that the extension dedicated instruction ANRI 4002 4003 25 Program f At status change i INSTRUCTION CODE ERROR format in the p
175. external device such as push button switches selector switches limit switches digital switches c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a Push button switch 3 Q pE amp g Selector switch Input X ae c Ne Sequence operation Digital switch ae 52 F 50 o2 5E Diagram 9 2 Commands from external devices to CPU module RIS ce 2 Concept of input X If the input point is the Xn virtual relay inside the CPU module the program uses the Xn s N O contact or N C contact 8 Virtual relay E FRI X100 8 O oH Programmable LS2 X102 le controller o Ti PB8 i a X108 O f v v Input ladder external device Program Diagram 9 3 Inputs X 3 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of Xn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded rat 00 X104 No restrictions on the Lx100 X102 X104 quantity used Migi Y 100 Y101 4X10 Te h Diagram 9 4 Input X Used in Program 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 5 9 2 1 Input X Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSECIEN ries EJPOINT 1 When debugging a program an input X can be turned ON OFF by the following methods GX Developer test operation e OUT Xn instruction OUTX100 ON OFF command r4 X100 Diagram 9 5 Input X ON OFF by the OUT Xn ins
176. f I O Number Assignment This section shows an I O number assignment example when I O assignment is set in GX Developer 1 When setting the number of I O points for mounted modules Set 32 points for the slots where CC Link Safety master module or CC Link IE Controller Network module is mounted so that the I O numbers do not change even when the module is removed due to the breakdown of CC Link Safety master module or CC Link IE Controller Network module a System configuration and I O number assignment Base unit CPU 0 1 2 g an Slot number o z2 z2e 5 2 2535 25 3 OSlaBIE90 aglo glS E gt l l u x 3g 7g gs u ojo aji O EJO E Z z 32 32 TT ee I O point QOH 20H 40H 5 Gates VO number 1FH 3FH 5FH Diagram 4 6 System configuration and I O number assignment b O assignment setting with GX Developer Set 32points to the slot No 0 to 2 on the I O assignment setting tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting Select 32 points When the type is not selected Slat Type the type of the installed Lo ric Puc Switch setting 32points TARTS module will be selected ak 2 2 32points L4 33 1 0 Assignment Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving th
177. fety mode to test mode switching 11 CPU Access password Registering a CPU access password x O O x x Changing a CPU access password x O O 12 Safety CPU Operation PLC memory initialization x O O x x O The function operates x The function does not operate This combination does not exist 41 Indicates the stop error due to moderate error or severe error For details on moderate errors and severe errors refer to the following manual L gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 5 Online operations that can be executed on the CPU module from GX Developer 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAS series 6 Safety mode wait for restart Safety mode Durin i Durin i STOP Stoperror switching goalie STOP Stoperror Switching ae 85 status 4 from STOP status 4 from STOP g 8 to RUN processing to RUN processing 5 x x Z x x x x x a B ZE O O O O O x x O O O O O x x x x x x x x x za 5 x x x x x x x aoe amp co pan x x x x x x x 3 23 BEL x x x x x x x now x x im x x x x x x x x x x x x E o E x x x x x x x 3 g x x x x x x x 3 Q O O O O O x x O O O O O x x O O O O O x x E O O
178. fter the output Y status before the STOP status is output the sequence program calculations are performed Overview b Output Y is cleared The output becomes OFF status The output Y is output after the operation of sequence program Refer to 5 for the operation when performing forced ON of output Y at STOP status Performance Specification STOP status RUN status NO Set Recalculate Is Previous state set Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions YES Set Previous state default Output the output Y status right before changing to STOP status Execute the sequence program calculations Diagram 6 21 Processing when Change from STOP Status to RUN Status Clear the output Y status 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 10 Setting of Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN 6 43 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES eres 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from STOP Status to RUN Status Set the output Y status when changing from the STOP status to the RUN status in the PLC system of the PLC parameter dialog box QS Parameter i PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting Timer limit setting Low 100 ms 1ms 1000ms Common pointer No P After speed Hi
179. gh 10 0 O 1ms 100 z speed wai ug Points occupied by empty slot 16 Points RUN PAUSE contacts P System interrupt settings ouput more al RUNA KO XI7FF Interrupt counter start No C 0 384 nterrupt counter start No C STOP to RUN PAUSE Xx 0 1 7FF Fixed scan interval Remote reset 128 ms 2ms 1000ms Iv All ze 129 ms 2ms 1000ms Output mode at STOP to RUN Previous state 130 ms 2ms 1000ms Recalculate output is 1 scan later 131 i ms 2ms 1000ms Floating point arithmetic processing Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting jE Intelligent function module setting iens Module synchronization APLC i Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Diagram 6 22 PLC system screen 5 Precaution When performing forced ON at STOP status of the CPU module the output at switching from STOP status to RUN status is as shown in Table6 15 Table6 15 Output at switching from STOP status to RUN status after performing forced ON to output Y Output mode at switching from STOP to RUN Output Y status prior to Output the status before STOP Output at switching from STOP status to RUN status STOP is output If the output Y is OFF before STOP ON status is not maintained Outputs Y is cleared Maintain ON status 6 44 6 10 Setting of Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LOS cries 6 11 Clock Function 1
180. gister z oO i Set by Corresponding 5 Number Name Meaning Explanation When set CPU k 8 3 SD5 A Common information corresponding to the error codes SD0 is stored here The following seven types of information are stored here 2 SD6 1 Module No Base No F S Number Meaning SD5 Slot No Base No 1 o SD7 SD6 I O No 2 3 SD7 SD8 2 SD9 OF SD10 SD8 SD11 Empty SD12 SD13 SD14 ao SD9 SD15 g F A T gt 1 The storing value 255 in SD5 Slot No indicates that the a a slot number for a module specified by an instruction cannot amp 2 Error be identified When storing the base number to SD5 store 0 5 is Error common gt os SD10 common main base unit S Error QS gD information tormation 2 The storing value FFFFH in SD6 I O No indicates that the aa 1 O number cannot be identified on the I O assignment setting tab of PLC parameter due to overlapping of I O numbers or SD11 that the I O number cannot be identified from the network number specified by an instruction In this case the error location can be identified in SD5 2 File name Drive name D12 F Number Meaning Example File name 8 SD5 Dri MAIN QPG 2 Spe me b15 to b8 b7 to bO 5 SD7 41H A 4DH M Es sp13 SD5 Filg name 4EH N 434 1 59 ASCII code 8 characters 20H SP 20H SP SD10 Extension 3 _ 2EH a suse SD11 A
181. h Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 7 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs 3 18 3 7 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT M aLS HC QS eres CHAPTER4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT This chapter explains the I O number assignment required for the CPU module to communicate data with I O modules and or intelligent function modules 4 1 Definition of I O Number I O numbers indicate the addresses used in a sequence program to input or output ON OFF data between the CPU module and other modules 1 Input and output of ON OFF data Input X is used to input ON OFF data to the CPU module and output Y is used to output ON OFF data from the CPU module 2 1 0 number expressions I O numbers are expressed as hexadecimal 4 1 4 1 Definition of I O Number 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELEGEN erie 4 2 Concept of I O Number Assignment 4 2 1 I O numbers of base unit Overview The CPU module assigns I O numbers when the programmable controller is powered ON or the reset operation of the CPU module is performed I O numbers are assigned automatically from the right side of the CPU module of the main base unit Performance Specification When two CC Link Safety master modules and one CC Link IE controller module are mounted on the main base unit the I O numbers are assigned as shown in Figure 4 1 Base unit Slot number QO v o N w
182. he I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F 0 25 lt lt lt Active open processing of connection No 1 gt gt gt M5000 PLS M1000 Receive Open instruction instruction 1PLS 1PLS 1 i lt Using Open setting parameters of GX Developer gt i M1000 X19 x10 M110 h t i MOVP HO D100 I Open Initial Connection Connection i Execution type instruction normal 1 open 1 open totter e ttt eer ttre ert treet 1PLS completion completion request Ej lt Using control data in D100 gt signal signal I i l i MOVP H8000 D100 i Execution type i i MmovP Ho D102 I Application setting area l i MOVP H1000 D103 l 1 Host station l I port number l ji T DMovp H0A6155DF Do4 Ji 1 Destination l l IP address l MOvP H2000 D106 i Destination l l port number RRS RR oR E OEA ON PP Ee STE eee E _ ZP OPEN UO K1 D100 M100 Execution OPEN type instruction completion device SET M110 Connection 1 open request M100 M101 E a L 1 SET M150 OPEN OPEN OPEN instruction instruction instruction completion abnormal normal device completion completion device M101 SET M151 OPEN instruction OPEN P abnormal instruction compton oat device RST m10 Fig App 1 Program example using I O signals 1 Required when using Open setting parameters of GX Developer 2 Required when not using Open setting parameters
183. he RUN status e When the RUN contact is ON the CPU module enters the STOP status Step0 END Step 0 END ON ooo oO n Remote RUN contact OFE STOP _ CPU module RUN STOP status RYN STOP status Diagram 6 24 Time Chart for RUN STOP with RUN Contact b Method by GX Developer RUN STOP of the CPU module can be executed by performing remote RUN STOP operation with GX Developer Operate GX Developer by choosing Online Remote operation Step 0 END Step 0 END ON 0 Remote STOP _ gf EE GX Developer command OFF ON Remote RUN OFF _f o command STOP RUN STOP RUN status STOP status Diagram 6 25 Remote RUN STOP by GX Developer 6 12 Remote Operation 6 49 6 12 1 Remote RUN STOP Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 Le Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS 6 50 MELSEC LES eries 5 Precautions Take note of the following because STOP has priority in CPU module a Timing of changing to STOP status The CPU module is put in the STOP status when remote STOP is executed from any of the followings RUN contact GX Developer b To put CPU module in RUN status again after remote STOP When placing the CPU module in the RUN status again after putting it
184. heir setting availability with GX Developer MNET H mode control station MNET H EX control station x 5E MNET H mode normal station MNET H EX normal station MNET 10 mode control station amp Network type 5 MNET 10 mode normal station PS MNET H standby station a MNET H remote master station Starting I O No 33 aa Network No Total number of slave stations Group No Mode Network range assignment common parameters Station inherent parameters Appendices Refresh parameters Interrupt setting Control station return setting Standby station compatible module Redundant setting Inter link data transfer Routing parameters Index x O x x lx x lx lO lx xlOlO x OlO lx x lOlx O Valid unit in access to another station O Available x Not available eeeeeoeseseoeaoeeveeeeoeeeeoeeeeeeceeeoeeeseeoeeeoeeeeeeoeeee eed For details on the MELSECNETHH refer to the following manual LC Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network eeeeeeeseeeaoeseceoeoeoseeaeeeoeoseeeeeeeeoeoseeeeoeseeeaoeeeeeoeeeeee eee e Appendix 5 Restrictions on Using MELSECNET H Module with Safety App 31 CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES res 2 MELSECNET H network system functions which can be used in the safety CPU module TableApp 22 lists the functions of MELSECNET H and their availability in the safety CPU module TableApp 22 L
185. here the level of risk to human life health or property are elevated REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Sep 2006 SH NA 080627ENG A First edition Jun 2007 SH NA 080627ENG B Partial correction Section 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 3 4 2 2 5 3 3 6 10 9 1 9 2 9 2 4 9 2 8 9 5 Apr 2008 SH NA 080627ENG C Partial correction ABOUT MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 1 2 2 Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 4 1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 1 6 2 1 6 2 4 6 7 7 2 Chapter 8 Section 8 1 8 2 9 2 1 9 2 6 9 2 7 9 2 11 9 2 12 10 1 1 10 1 2 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix3 Appendix 5 Addition 6 16 7 3 7 4 8 3 Appendix 4 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 7 2 Appendix 8 Appendix 9 SH NA 080627ENG D Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Appendix 6 Appendix 10 Apr 2009 SH NA 080627ENG E Partial correction Chapter 1 Section 5 2 6 14 1 8 1 10 1 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 Appendix5 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 1 7 2 Appendix 8 Feb 2010 SH NA 080627ENG F Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 2 Section 9 2 8 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Jul 2010 SH NA 080627ENG G Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 1 Chapter 2 May 2011 SH NA 080627ENG H Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABOUT MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section
186. hich can be set in the safety CPU module TableApp 23 lists the network parameters for Ethernet and their setting availability with GX Developer when the Ethernet module is used with the safety CPU module TableApp 23 List of network parameters and their setting availability with GX Developer Item Setting availability Network type Ethernet O Starting I O No Network No Group No Station No Mode Operational settings Initial settings Open settings Router relay parameter Station No lt gt IP information FTP parameters E mail settings Interrupt settings Redundant settings Valid module during other station access Routing parameters O x x x x x O lO O O O O O O O O O Available x Not available Remark eeeeeaoeeweeoeseeoeaeoeeeceeeeeeeeeoeeeeaeoseeeeeeoeoeseeeeeeoeaoe eed App 34 Module For details on the Ethernet refer to the following manual L gt Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic L gt Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application eeeeeeveveeoeeeeeeaeveeoeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaoeeeeee Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie 2 Ethernet functions which can be used in the safety CPU m
187. hing EEE Ee File name MAIN QPG 2 E SFC block Nothing SFC step specification Nothing SFC switching Nothing Block No 0 Step No Switching 0 Sequence step No 1 a 2 3 U a Operation history b Error history Diagram 6 14 Operation history Error history details screen Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 8 Recording the operation contents and self diagnostics error occurrence contents operation error history 6 37 function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES eres 5 Operation error history clear The operation error history of the CPU module can be cleared by pressing the Clear log button on the GX Developer PLC Diagnostics screen The operation error history clear operation is only valid when the CPU module safety CPU operation mode is TEST MODE When the operation error history is cleared the CPU module stores the operation contents OP200 CLEAR OPERATION ERROR LOG in the operation error history 4 POINT The operation error history is retained by the CPU module battery At the power on or the reset cancel the CPU module checks if the operation error history has not been lost or damaged When the CPU module detects that the operation error history has been lost or damaged due to battery low etc the CPU module initializes the operation error history When the CPU module initializes the operation error history operation contents OP003 SYSTEM INITIALI
188. i Function description MELSECNET instruction Controller H Ethernet Network For opening and closing OPEN Establishes a connection x x O connections CLOSE Disconnects a connection x x O BUFRCV Reads received data for main program x x O For fixed buffer communication BUFSND Sends data x x O For reading and clearing error ERRCLR Clears error information x x O information ERRRD Reads error information x x O For reinitialization UINI Reinitializes the Ethernet module x x O Reads data from word devices of the CPU READ O O O module on another station Reads data from word devices of the CPU SREAD module on another station with completion O O O devices Writes data to word devices of the CPU module WRITE O O O on another station For communication with Writes data to word devices of the CPU module programmable controller CPU SWRITE f O O O i on another station with completion devices on another station Data link r 5 Reads clock data from the CPU module on instruction another station 2 REQ e Writes clock data to the CPU module on another station Reads clock data from the CPU module on RTMRD O O x another station Writes clock data to the CPU module on another RTMWR stati n O O x ion O Available x Not available 41 Only connection No 1 to No 8 can be specified If the specified connection is out of the range an OPERATION ERROR error code 4
189. icates a start I O No 16 value Sg N __ Indicates the module number 55 M Indicates the network type 2e ZE Table8 9 Network type for CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Controller Network and ge 5 MELSECNETHH setting gt 1 2 3 in this section i M Network type r CC IE Control Normal station CC IE Field Master station Safety CC IE Field Vi gt Local station Safety CC IE Field Local station MELSECNET H mode Normal H station MELSECNET 10 mode Normal station MELSECNET H Extended mode E Normal station E 3 Q Table8 10 Network type for CC Link setting lt gt 4 in this section M Network type k OH Master station F 3 i gt PO S 3 e zS 533 O S p D 2 o 3 p a 8 2 Network Parameters 8 10 8 PARAMETERS 1 CC Link IE Field Network setting Set the network parameters for CC Link IE Field Network E Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards AG QS ee Network type CCIE Field Master station Safety Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Mode 0000 Online Normal Mode Network Configuration Setting Network Operation Setting Refresh parameters pecify station No by parameter Safety communication setting Necessary setting No setting Already set Start 1 0 No Setifitisneeded No setting 7 Already set i Please input
190. ication Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 3 5 Q CSV file creating 8 Bre Diagram 1 13 System monitor o gt Sf POINT The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the module e The serial No on the rated plate describes the management information of the product e The serial No displayed on the product information of GX Developer E describes the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when adding functions c 528 O S 1 4 How to Check the Serial No and Function Version Parameters 1 11 2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION CHAPTER2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION Table2 1 shows the performance specifications of the CPU module Item Control method Table2 1 Performance Specifications QS001CPU Repetitive operation of stored program MELSECIEN ries Remarks I O control mode Refresh mode Program Sequence control g SA Relay symbol language function block language language Processing speed LD X0 0 10Us sequence Coane MOV DO D1 0 35us instruction Constant scan 1 to 2000ms Function for keeping regular scan Setting available inims unit Setting by parameters time 14K steps lt gt Section 5 1 1 mr A F AA aaa 56K bytes Section 5 1 2 Program memory
191. ices 9 33 9 3 2 Special register SD Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 34 9 4 Nesting N 1 Definition Nesting is a device used in the master control instruction MC instruction MCR instruction to program operation conditions in a nesting structure 2 Specifying method in master control instruction The master control instruction opens closes a common ladder bus to create a sequence program of efficient ladder switching Specify nesting in ascending order in order of NO to N14 starting from the outside of the nesting structure Refer to the following manual for how to use nesting L gt QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions H m na mite NO nesting control range N1 nesting control range N2 nesting control range 9 4 Nesting N Diagram 9 37 Program example using nesting MELSEC LES ries Designated in ascending No order Executed when gt condition A is satisfied Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied Designated in descending No order _ Executed when condition A B and C are satisfied Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied Executed when condition A is satisfied Executed regardless gt of A B C condition statuses Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES res 9 5 Constants 9 5 1 Decimal constant
192. ices using the MC protocol e Communication with CC Link IE Field Network e Communication with other stations via CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H 3 4 RUN STOP Operation Processing 3 10 Overview Performance Specification oO 2 3 e CUS oa e E Sco a920 o o ess TF GEQ 0 G X now 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSECIEN ries 3 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure When the input voltage supplied to the power supply module drops below the specified range the CPU module detects a momentary power failure and performs the following operation 1 When momentary power failure occurs for a period shorter than the permitted power failure time The output is maintained when the momentary power failure occurs and error history are logged Then the system interrupts the operation processing The timer clock continues a When recovered from momentary power failure When a momentary power failure ends the operation processing is resumed b Watchdog timer WDT measurement during momentary power failure Even if the operation is interrupted due to momentary power failure the watchdog timer WDT measurement continues For example if the GX Developer PLC parameter mode WDT setting is set at 200 ms when a
193. icrocomputer diagnostics During execution oS gt operate correctly ip of the END 8010 INTERNAL BUS ERROR o instruction 55S B ly volt Checks that the CPU modul tes at zZ 8 CASS aah eal E oe ee eee ee Always 8080 POWER SUPPLY ERROR monitoring voltage within the operation guaranteed range 6 z ly volt Duri ti e T ES MEE Checks that the power supply voltage aE eA eEOn VOLTAGE DIAGNOSIS 9 monitoring circuit ee Piper of the END 8090 k monitoring circuit operates correctly ERROR diagnostics instruction Checks that clock input to the CPU modul 10 Clock stop detection E renege al Ae les Always 8120 WDT CLOCK CHECK ERROR internal circuit is not stopped no Checks that th in CPU t Il 5 11 CPU module OS ee eee ee sAlWayS 1000 1006 MAIN CPU DOWN without detecting runaway 5 Checks that the following hardware of the CPU modue operates correctly 1001 1002 12 CPU module hardware Main CPU Always MAIN CPU DOWN 1003 1004 Clock element RUN STOP RESET switch Sc Checks that the power supply module operates 3 13 Power supply module Always 1009 MAIN CPU DOWN ge normally y z n During execution 55 Checks that the END instructi ted at 2 14 Program E A A en etl o ie END 1010 END NOT EXECUTE TE the end of the user program A Sez instruction OS Checks that no invalid interrupt occurs within CPU module b it At inte t 45 modue pase unl the intelligent function module base unit or eles 1311 0 INTERRUPT ERR
194. ided as a guide for Customer s use They do not constitute warranties and are not incorporated in the contract of sale for the Products h These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Customer and MELCO with respect to warranties remedies and damages and supersede any other understandings whether written or oral between the parties Customer expressly acknowledges that any representations or statements made by MELCO or others concerning the Products outside these terms are not part of the basis of the bargain between the parties and are not factored into the pricing of the Products i THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THESE TERMS ARE THE EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES THAT APPLY TO THE PRODUCTS j MELCO DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 3 Limits on Damages a MELCO S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE LIABILITY BASED ON ANY CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT TORT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORIES OF RECOVERY REGARDING THE SALE REPAIR REPLACEMENT DELIVERY PERFORMANCE CONDITION SUITABILITY COMPLIANCE OR OTHER ASPECTS OF THE PRODUCTS OR THEIR SALE INSTALLATION OR USE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PRICE PAID FOR PRODUCTS NOT AS WARRANTED b Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product s compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 and EN954 1 ISO13849 1 from TUV Rheinland this fact does not guarantee that Product will
195. ield Error information common Network information individual information 1 1 Features 1 23 Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 1 OVERVIEW MELSECIEN rics 4 Enhanced RAS a Enhanced memory diagnostics The memory diagnostics equipped with the CPU module are enhanced b Redundant CPU The CPU module has two CPUs CPU A and CPU B The operation results of CPU A CPU B are compared and output only when the results are matched so that incorrect outputs can be prevented When the compared results are mismatched the system stops CPU module CPU CPU A B Operation Operation result Compare result Output when matched Figure 1 2 Redundant CPU c Enhanced hardware diagnostics by hardware circuit The diagnostic functions of the Table1 3 prevents incorrect outputs when a hardware error which cannot be detected by the OS occurs Table1 3 Hardware diagnostics function added to the QS series CPU module PIET LOKI Diagnosis Contents Overvoltage Overvoltage or undervoltage is detected for the power supply voltage undervoltage detection provided from the power supply module to the CPU module Clock stop detection The input clock stop
196. imer 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 QS em b Measurement units The default time measurement units setting for low speed timers is 100 ms The time measurement units setting can be designated in 1 ms units within a 1 ms to 1000 ms range This setting is designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box c 0 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a 5 High speed timers 3 o a Definition 3 High speed timers performs counting in 0 1 to 100ms units RE aE The timer is valid only while its coil is ON and has a symbol H The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when the time elapses When the timer s coil switches OFF the Le O current value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF eS Q 50 Ladder example High speed timer display 5 X100 H K50 When X100 switches ON the T200 coil switches ON S lt T200 and the contact switches ON 0 5 second later The a high speed timer measures time in 10 ms units Time chart X100 is T200 coil i T200 contact Diagram 9 19 Ladder example and timing chart of high speed timer b Measurement units The default time measurement units setting for high speed timers is 10 ms The time measurement units setting can be designated in 0 1ms units within a 0 1 3 ms to 100 ms range This setting is designated at the PLC system
197. in the STOP status by remote STOP perform remote RUN in the order that remote STOP was executed first POINT 1 The RUN STOP status is described below e RUN Status Status in which the calculations are repeatedly executed from step 0 to the END FEND instruction in the sequence program e STOP Status 0000 Status in which the sequence program calculations are stopped and the output Y is all OFF 2 After being reset the CPU module is put to RUN STOP status according to the RUN STOP RESET switch setting 6 12 Remote Operation 6 12 1 Remote RUN STOP 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES res 6 12 2 Remote RESET 1 Definition of Remote RESET 2 3 4 A remote reset is an operation that resets the CPU module using GX Developer when the CPU module is in the STOP status Even if RUN STOP RESET switch is in RUN the reset can be performed when the CPU module is stopped and an error that can be detected by the self diagnosis function occurs Applications of remote RESET A remote reset can reset the CPU module using GX Developer when an error that is beyond the reach of the CPU module occurs Remote RESET method Remote RESET operation can be performed by only GX Developer To perform the remote RESET follow the following steps e When the CPU module is in RUN status use remote STOP to arrange the STOP status e Reset CPU module by the remote RESET operation For the GX Develop
198. ing conditions of the CPU module 6 18 O Available x N A 6 1 Function List Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intelligent Function Module Overview Performance Specification 1 0 Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 Le Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 1 Safety CPU operation mode The safety CPU operation mode has SAFETY MODE and TEST MODE Switch the safety CPU operation mode by operations from GX Developer 1 SAFETY MODE This mode is used for the main operation of the safety related system In SAFETY MODE to protect this system while it is operating operations that change safety programmable controller control such as writing to PLC and device test are prohibited CPU module Program Parameter Program parameters and device data cannot be changed Input from the Output the program controlled system operation results Controlled system GX Developer Diagram 6 1 SAFETY MODE operation 6 2 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 1 Safety CPU operation mode FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 2 TEST MODE This mode is used for system start up and maintenance In this mode all the GX Developer functions such as PLC writing and device testing can be used
199. ink IE Controller Network is used with the safety CPU module TableApp 19 List of network parameters and their setting availability with GX Developer Item Setting availability CC IE Control control station x CC IE Control Normal station Network type Starting I O No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Mode Network range assignment common parameters x Refresh parameters Interrupt settings Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other station access Station number specification method x x O lx1x lO lxlO O lO x O O O O Available x Not available Remark eeeeeeee cee eweseesceaoeeeoeseeeeceaeseoeseeeeevoeeeeeaoeaoeceoeaeeeeaeeae eee For details on CC Link IE Controller Network refer to the following manual L gt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual eeseeoaoseeeceoeeoeeeseseoeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeceoseeeeeeeeeoeeoeao eee App 28 Appendix 4 Restrictions on Using CC Link IE Controller Network Module with Safety CPU Module APPENDICES aL SEC TM eres 2 CC Link IE Controller Network functions which can be used in the safety CPU module TableApp 20 lists the functions of CC Link IE Controller Network and their availability in the safety CPU module TableApp 20 List of CC Link IE Controller Network functions and their availability in safety CPU module Function Availability
200. ink IE Field Network diagnostics is executed Increase in scan time when the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics is executed CPU module model name When Network Event When other diagnostics History is executed items are executed QS001CPU 3 0 ms 1 2 ms Index 10 1 Scan Time 1 0 6 10 1 3 Factors that increase the scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME M aLS 26 Qs em 10 2 Other Processing Times This section explains the processing times other than those described in Section 10 1 1 Constant scan accuracy Table10 7 indicates the constant scan accuracy Table10 7 Constant scan accuracy CPU module Constant scan accuracy QS001CPU 2ms With monitor Indicates the status in which monitor is being executed with GX Developer connected Without monitor Indicates the status in which monitor is not executed by GX Developer 1 0 7 10 2 Other Processing Times 1 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE M aL E0 QS cries CHAPTER11 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE Device Explanation This chapter describes the procedure for writing program created at the GX Developer to the CPU module The CPU module startup procedure is not described in this manual Refer to the following manuals for the CPU module startup procedure K gt QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Time 11 1 Items to be examined for program creation MA CPU Module Pr
201. ins the online functions of GX Developer such as the programming printout monitoring and debugging SH 080373E methods 13JU41 Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Safety Programmable Controller Explains the GX Developer functions added and modified for the compatibility with the safety programmable controller SH 080576ENG 13JU53 Sold separately Printed materials are separately available for single item purchase Order the manual by quoting the manual number on the table above Model code A 18 HOW TO SEE THIS MANUAL IS ORGANIZED Reference destination Chapter heading A reference destination or The index on the right side of the page reference manual is marked shows the chapter of the open page at a C glance 5 MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE 5 1 3 Standard ROM 1 Definition of standard ROM The standard ROM is used to execute boot run by the CPU module The standard ROM is used to save programs and parameters without battery backup The program sto in the standard ROM is booted read to the program memory veri 2 Storable data R The standard ROM can store parameters programs and device comments 4 Refer to Section 5 1 1 2 for the list of data that can be stored into each memory 3 Checking the memory capacity To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer E 1 Select Standard ROM a
202. inuation error can be checked by the bit which is turned 1 of SD81 error factor Error factor continuation error corresponding to the bit number of SD871 is shown in Table6 12 Table6 12 Error factor error code corresponding to bit number of SD81 Bit number of SD81 error factor corresponding to Continuation error corresponding to bit number of continuation error SD81 a a Instantaneous power failure 1500 AC DC DOWN 1 Battery low 1600 BATTERY ERROR 2 Standard ROM write count excess 1610 EXCEED MAX FLASH ROM REWRIT ERR Test mode continuous RUN tolerance 3 8100 TEST MODE TIME EXCEEDED timeout 4 Scan timeout 5010 PROGRAM SCAN TIME OVER F indicates the annunciator 5 Annunciator ON 9000 number Safety remote station detection error 8300 CC LINK REMOTE DETECTION ERROR 6 Safety communication target station fF 8400 CC IE ANOTHER MODULE DETECT ERR detection error Safety remote station product information 8310 CC LINK PRODUCT INFO MISMATCH 7 mismatch Safety station product information mismatch 8410 CC IE PRODUCT INFO MISMATCH Initial monitoring timeout error 8320 Safety monitoring timeout error 8321 CC LINK DATA RECEPTION TIMEOUT Error monitoring timeout error 8322 8420 8 8421 EOS 8422 Safety monitoring timeout error 8423 CC IE DATA RECEPTION TIMEOUT 8424 8425 Safety remote station command error 8330 Safety remote station data split error 8331 Safety remote station link ID er
203. is setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Auto C Detail asuvia iee Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Diagram 4 7 I O assignment 4 9 4 3 I O Assignment by GX Developer 4 3 3 Examples of I O Number Assignment 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT M aL 26 Qs em 4 4 Checking the I O Numbers The modules mounted on the main base unit and their I O numbers can be checked using the GX Developer system monitor gt Section 6 17 Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions A E oO E E D N n lt fo pe i Zz ie Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 4 4 Checking the I O Numbers 4 10 4 3 3 Examples of I O Number Assignment D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M aL 26 eS CHAPTERS MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 1 Memory configuration and storable data This section explains the memories handled by the CPU module and the data that can be stored into the memories 1 Memory configuration Program memory Parameter Program Standard ROM CPU module Diagram 5 1 Data handled by CPU module a Program memory gt Section 5 1 2 The progra
204. ist of MELSECNETI H functions and their availability in safety CPU module Function Availability Communication by LB LW O Communication by LX LY MELSECNET H extended mode Refresh parameter Cyclic transmission Common parameter function Station inherent parameter Interlink data transfer function Reserved station specification Low speed cyclic transmission function Redundant system function Communication function Routing function Group function Message sending function using logical channel numbers Sending receiving data SEND RECV Receiving data on another station for interrupt program RECVS Reading writing data from to word device on another station READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE x x x O lO O x O O x x O lO O O O Transienttransmission function O Clock data read write Remote RUN STOP Reading writing data from to word device on another station ZNRD ZNWR Remote RUN STOP RRUN RSTOP Reading writing clock data from to the CPU module on another station RTMRD RTMWR Automatic return function Transient request to another station REQ x x x O Control station switching function Control station return control function Loopback function optical loop system Prevention of station failure by using external power supply optical loop system Station detach function coaxial bus system RAS function
205. itching To switch the safety CPU operation mode execute the GX Developer safety CPU operation mode switching operation 1 Safety CPU operation mode switching conditions The safety CPU operation mode can be switched in the states shown in Table6 4 Table6 4 Conditions under which the safety CPU operation mode can be switched EF Ex TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE to Safety CPU operation mode switching conditions SAFETY MODE TEST MODE STOP status which does STOP status which CPU operation status not include one due to stop includes one due to error stop error Program and parameters of GX Developer and program Should be the same memory Other GX Developer operations such as PLC writing and Should not be executed device testing Other safety CPU operation mode switching operations Should not be Should not be executed using GX Developer executed 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 2 Safety CPU operation mode switching procedure This explains the procedure for switching the safety CPU operation mode by operating the GX Developer safety CPU operation mode switching Overview a TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE switching Diagram 6 5 shows the procedure for TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE switching using GX Developer Start Performance Specification
206. ite to PLC STOP status O Test mode Stop error 4 Duri ng switching from STOP to RUN x During initial processing Read from PLC Verify with PLC Delete PLC data Drive operation Arrange PLC memory Format PLC memory Drive title registration Drive title deletion Write the program memory to ROM x x O x x x O O x X x x x X X X x X XIXI x X X x x x PLC memory operation Clear PLC memory x O JOJOJOJ O OJO OJO O JOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJO x x Proguram change Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN O O O Writing in T C set value during CPU Module RUN x x Monitor Ladder monitor Device batch monitor Entry data monitor Buffer memory batch Program monitor list Device test Remote operation Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote RESET Set clock Reading Time Data Changing the clock data Diagnostics PLC diagnostics Operation error history clear MELSECNET II 10 H diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics System monitor 10 Safety CPU operation Test mode to safety mode switching X1OJOJOJOJ O OJO xX O O SOJOJO O JOJO O OJOJOJOJOJOSOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJO O X1O JOJOJO O OJOJO xX xX O OJOJOJOJO XIXI IXI XIXI XI XIXIXIXI XI XIX IXI XI IXJIX XIXI x x x x x x x x xK xKx xK x x x x Sa
207. ked with the ALIVE LED and TEST LED on the front of the CPU module Table6 2 Checking safety CPU operation mode with the ALIVE LED and TEST LED TEST MODE SAFETY MODE wait for restart SAFETY MODE ON ON ON A Flashing ON a OFF avel hee ones TEST avel TEST RUN USER RUN USER RUN USER ERR BAT ERR BAT ERR 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 5 6 2 2 Checking safety CPU operation mode Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS MELSECIEN res 2 Checking with the GX Developer online operation screen The current safety CPU operation mode of the CPU module is displayed on the GX Developer online operation screen PLC diagnostics remote operation etc The safety CPU operation mode can be checked when executing remote operations etc with GX Developer Remote operation Connection target information Connection interface USB lt gt PLC module Target PLC Station no Host PLC type QS001 PLC status The current safety CPU operation mode is displayed OE f Operation during RUN Device memory Do not clear
208. l registers can be assigned as shown below Safety CPU Link special register SwWwo For the 1st network 512 module SW1FF points Fp For the 2nd network 512 5 module oink 1536 SW3FF pol points bate For the 3rd network 5 512 module SW5FF points Remark ooo ooo coor For details on the link special register refer to the manual L gt The manual for each network module eeeeeoeeeeseeoeeoeeeeeeoeoeoseeeoeeeeeoeeeeeseeeoeoeaeeeeoeeeeeeeea ee 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 31 9 2 12 Link special register SW Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES eres 9 3 Internal System Devices Internal system devices are used for system operations The allocations and sizes of internal system devices are fixed and cannot be changed by the user 9 3 1 Special relay SM 1 Definition Special relay stores the CPU module states error diagnostics system information etc 2 Special relay classifications Special relays are classified according to their applications as shown in Table9 5 Table9 5 Special relay classification list Classification Special relay Diagnostics information SMO to SM99 System information SM200 to SM399 System clock system counter SM400 to SM499 Safety CPU SM560 to SM599 Boot SM600 to SM699 Instruction related SM700 to SM799 CC Link Safety SM1000 to SM1299 CC Link IE Field Network SM1400 to SM1799 3 Special relay that can be used i
209. le controller system may cause malfunctions and safety operation cannot be guaranteed When a safety remote I O module has detected a CC Link Safety error it turns off all the outputs Note that the outputs in a sequence program are not automatically turned off If a CC Link Safety or CC Link IE Field Network error has been detected create a sequence program that turns off the outputs in the program If the CC Link Safety or CC Link IE Field Network is restored with the outputs on it may suddenly operate and result in an accident To inhibit restart without manual operation after safety functions was performed and outputs were turned OFF create an interlock program which uses a reset button for restart To prevent an illegal operation and malfunction do not connect a safety programmable controller to the Internet or to a wireless LAN Design Precautions CAUTION Do not bunch the wires of external devices or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation Time from when the CPU module is powered on or is reset to when it enters in RUN status depends on the system configuration parameter settings and program size Design the program so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Installation
210. llation or wiring be sure to close the attached terminal cover Not doing so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 Q or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use a solderless terminal with insulation sleeve for wiring of a terminal block Use up to two solderless terminals for a single terminal Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Wire the module correctly after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout Connecting a power supply of a different rated voltage or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Tighten a terminal block mounting screw terminal screw and module mounting screw within the specified torque range If the terminal block mounting screw or terminal screw is too loose it may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the screw or module a short circuit or malfunctions If the module mounting screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the screw or module Overtightening the screw may cause a drop due to the damage of the screw or module Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wi
211. ly 9 2 4 Control panel 9 2 5 Grounding 9 2 6 External wiring 9 3 Requirements for conpliance with the Macinery Directive CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 10 1 Calculating Heat Generation of programmable controller 10 2 Module Installation 10 2 1 Precaution on installation 10 2 2 Instructions for mounting the base unit 10 2 3 Installation and removal of module 10 3 Wiring 10 3 1 The precautions on the wiring 10 3 2 Connecting to the power supply module CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11 1 Daily Inspection 11 2 Periodic Inspection 11 3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure 11 3 1 Battery lives of CPU modules 11 3 2 Replacement Procedure of the CPU Module Battery 11 4 When programmable controller Has been Stored without a Battery 11 5 When Battery Has Gone Flat during Storage of a programmable controller CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 1 Troubleshooting Basics 12 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart 12 2 1 Troubleshooting category flow 12 2 2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal negative logic is off opened 12 2 3 Flowchart for when the POWER LED turn off 12 2 4 When the ALIVE LED does not turn on or turns off 12 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED turn off 12 2 6 When the RUN LED flashes A 15 12 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED turn on or flashes 12 2 8 When the USER LED turn on 12 2 9 When the BAT LED turn on 12 2 10 Flowchart for when a program cannot be read 12 2 11 Flowchart
212. m COCCO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOOOO 1 1 2 11 3 Boot run procedure COOOL OO OOOOH OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOO 11 4 APPENDICES App 1 to App 53 Appendix 1 Special Relay Liste seseeeeeeeeeeeseceeececeoococecoccoooocccocooococecococosocecocoeseoseeeceesescssesee ADD 1 Appendix 2 Special Register Liste eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceocsececeoeococccceoeoooocececeooooccceceooossocecessoseseeee ADD 7 Appendix 3 Parameter Number List esseeeeeeeesesceseeecesosoecooococoosccsooococososossosseosssscesosssessseee ADL 25 Appendix 4 Restrictions on Using CC Link IE Controller Network Module with Safety CPU Module App 28 Appendix 5 Restrictions on Using MELSECNET H Module with Safety CPU Modulessesseeeeseeseeses App 31 Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU Module eesseeeessseeeeesooe00000 ADD 34 Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module seseeseeseeeooeoee000000 ADD 39 Appendix 7 1 List of dedicated instructions seesseeeseeseseeseeeeeseesososeceocoscoosssccoooscceosececessseess ADD 39 Appendix 7 2 Programming using dedicated INSTFUCTIONS eeeeerecceooccccccccccccccoccccocssoooscooossooes AN 41 Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module Covccccccccsccccscoccccoocccooscococccooccococcosoocssoooes ADD 47 Appendix 9 Safety CPU Modul
213. m memory stores the program used by the CPU module to perform operation b Standard ROM gt gt Section 5 1 3 The standard ROM is used to execute boot run by the CPU module 5 4 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 1 Memory configuration and storable data D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M LS 26 SS 2 Data that can be stored into memories Table5 1 indicates the data that can be stored into the program memory and standard ROM and the corresponding drive Nos Overview Table5 1 Storable data and storage locations CPU module built in memories g File name and Drive No Standard ROM extension Parameter O PARAM QPA 2S Sequence program O MAIN QPG 5 F Device comment O O MAIN QCD E User setting system 4 O x area a Eos Necessary data O Storable data x Unstorable data Dag 256 41 Set the area used by the system _ gt Section 5 1 2 3 b 58 3 Memory capacities and formatting necessities Table5 2 indicates the memory capacity and formatting necessity of each memory Table5 2 Formatting necessity 3 Program memory 128K byte Necessary g Standard ROM 128K byte Unnecessary g 1 Before use be sure to format the memory using GX Developer ol 2 3 3 fe oO Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x n 2 T ke oO n A fe E v Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameter
214. m the left side vertical bus bar and ends at the right side vertical bus bar Left side vertical bus bar N O contact N C contact Coil output Om af me L Right side Y120 vertical bus bar Y121 4 122 Ladder block Y 124 X100 to 105 indicate inputs Y120 to 124 indicates outputs Diagram 3 3 Ladder mode 3 1 Sequence Program 3 1 1 Sequence program description method 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES eres 3 1 2 Sequence program operation 1 Calculation order of the ladder block The CPU module calculates in order from the left to the right side vertical bus and from top to bottom Overview Ladder mode From left to right gt 1 2 7 8 9 X100 X101 X105 X106 X107 10 _ mmy 110 Performance Specification From top to bottom oO 11 10 END 1 to 11 indicate operation order of sequence program Diagram 3 4 Calculation order of the ladder block 2 3 e ous ong E Sco oR OBC on e528 TE E oO GEQ 0 O X now 2 Execution operation of sequence program The sequence program is executed from Step 0 to the END instruction where END processing is performed After the END processing the program restarts operation from Step 0 Step 0 1 0 Nunber Assignment Indicates execution of program Sequence program Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files END processing Diagram
215. memory 1 AITTEN Boot gt Standard ROM Diagram 5 6 Boot run 1 SAFETY MODE In SAFETY MODE boot run is executed regardless of the boot settings made by GX Developer 2 TEST MODE Boot run can be executed by setting Execute boot run in the boot settings made by GX Developer and writing to the standard ROM x POINT In TEST MODE when debugging was executed with the program memory parameters and program write to the standard ROM at the time of switching from the TEST MODE to the SAFETY MODE 5 9 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M LS 26 SS 2 Procedure up to boot run and stopping boot run in TEST MODE a Procedure for boot run The following provides the procedure for boot run Overview 1 Program creation by GX Developer Create a program for executing boot run 2 Boot file by GX Developer Set Do boot from Standard ROM in the Boot file of the PLC parameter dialog box Performance Specification QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device 1 0 assignment Safety setting I Do boot from standard ROM This setting is valid only for test mode Safety mode settings uses standard ROM boot Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment ol Acknowledge xY assignment Default
216. module When setting a numeric value from an external digital switch or similar device to the CPU module BCD binary coded decimal can be used as the same setting in DEC decimal by the method given in b Overview a Numeric values handled in CPU module The CPU module performs operation in BIN binary If the value set in BCD is used as is the CPU module recognizes the set value as a BIN and performs operation Hence operation is performed using the value different from the set value gt b below b How to enter numeric value without taking into account BIN notation Use the BIN instruction to convert the data set in BCD into BIN used in the CPU module Using the BIN instruction allows users to set numeric value data from the outside without taking into account BIN notation Performance Specification oO 2 3 e ous ong E Sco ago ome on c52 EE eco GEO 0 O X now CPU module Numeric data designation E _ Digital switch BINP K4X100 DO 4 3 2 BCD input X10F to BIN data 1 0 Nunber Assignment IBCD D5 K4Y130 Diagram 3 9 Import of data from digital switch to CPU module eeeeeeeveeeveeoeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 8 Refer to the following manual for details of the BIN instruction L7 QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Handled by CPU Module Memories and Fil
217. momentary power failure of 15 ms occurs at scan time 190 ms the watchdog timer error is set Momentary power failure occurrence Power recovery ENDO ENDO END CPU module interrupts the operation Diagram 3 8 Operation during momentary power failure 2 When momentary power failure occurs for a period longer than the permitted power failure time CPU module starts initially The same operation processing as that after the following operation occurs Power ON e Resetting using RUN STOP RESET switch e Remote setting using GX Developer 3 11 3 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELEGEN erie 3 6 Data Clear Processing This section explains how to clear CPU module data Overview 1 Data clear methods There are the following six ways to clear CPU module data a Reset with the RUN STOP RESET switch GX Developer b Restarting the programmable controller System c PLC memory clear using GX Developer Performance Specification d PLC memory format using GX Developer oO e PLC memory initialization using GX Developer f History clear using GX Developer operation and error history clear 2 Data That Can and Cannot Be Cleared with Each Data Clearing Method Table3 2 shows which data can and cannot be cleared by the methods shown in 1 a to f 2 3 e kE Dug E Sco a20 o Oo S css TF GEQ Box now
218. ms in the dashed line App 46 Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELEGEN res Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module 5 The following pages show access range and accessibility from the programming tool and a GOT to a safety CPU module The safety CPU module does not perform routing between Ethernet and CC Link IE Controller Network or between Ethernet and MELSECNET H Abbreviations of module names and others used in the figures and tables in this section are shown in the table below 2 2 TableApp 35 Abbreviation used in the figures and tables in this section 3 QSCPU Safety CPU module CC LinkSafety CC Link Safety master module Ethernet Ethernet module 5 CClEcont CC Link IE Controller Network module Ps NET H MELSECNET H module 55 CClEfieSafety CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions g z QCPU Q series CPU module BS CC Link Q series CC Link master module aa C24 Q series serial communication module GXD1 GX Developer GXW2 GX Works2 GOT GOT G4 G4 module AJ65BT G4 AJ65BT G4 S3 Appendices Index Appendix 8 Access Range for Safety CPU Module App 47 APPENDICES GXD1 AO ELS AG Qs ies 1 When the first five digits of the serial No of the CPU module is 13041 or earlier a Access range ICClEcont ascpu CC rink CC Link Etnemet or ao
219. n Set S Status change S Error Set by When Set S Initial Set by When Set Number Name Meaning Explanation Pesi Safety refresh communication status of each OFF Normal The safety station refresh communication SM1004 safety remote ON Communication status is stored The status of each station are S Status change station error stored in SD1004 to SD1007 Safety master module 1 Safety refresh communication status ofeach OFF Normal The safety station refresh communication SM1204 safety remote ON _ Communication status is stored The status of each station are S Status change station error stored in SD1204 to SD1207 Safety master module 2 Appendix 1 Special Relay List Corresponding CPU Qs Corresponding CPU Qs Corresponding CPU Qs Corresponding CPU Qs App 5 Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES 8 CC Link IE Field Network TableApp 9 Special relay AG Qs ies Set b Number Name Meaning Explanation ais ne Setting status f safet ial 2 OFF Not set The setting status of safety communication with ey SM1400 communication A S Initial y ON Set the master station is stored with master station OFF Normal excluding SM1420 Safety refresh communication status of each safety station safety refresh
220. n TEST MODE is for preventing a continuous RUN for a long time in TEST MODE If the RUN state in TEST MODE exceeds the restriction time continuous RUN tolerance time in TEST MODE the TEST MODE TIME EXCEEDED error code 8100 continuation error occurs Overview 2 Measuring the continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE Performance Specification a Measurement start When the CPU module goes into RUN status in TEST MODE the measurement of the RUN continuous time in TEST MODE starts e_ Pel b Measurement stop ges When the CPU module goes into the state below the measurement of the TE continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE is stopped and the measurement FEF value is cleared e When the CPU module is put into the STOP status e When the programmable controller is power off E e When the CPU module is reset 5 lt Power on Power off Power on E Reset cancel Reset Reset cancel STOP RUN STOP RUN RUN Me enaa Inuou Operation status _ _ status Status status eee Status RUN time in status i i l i l Continuous RUN operation TEST MODE E i i i i i tmgin TESTMODE continues ge if l l l 1 1 it D 1 i 1 i 1 1 Tt o Measurement Y y as F E u 9 0 to nt Xo 0 to n2 LG to n3 n3 1 to oe value of i i K X latte dee 58 the continuous amp RUN time Sian Sia SA z ar a TEST MODE TIME EXCEEDED measurement measurement measurement of the continuation error Stop Measurement Clea
221. n between a CPU module and the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions is performed by link refresh 2 To execute link refresh the refresh parameters need to be set on the Ethernet CC IE 32 MELSECNET setting of the network parameter in GX Developer z5 For details on the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting items refer to Section 8 2 23 Ee St For details on the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting items of the network parameter refer to the following manual MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Functions bas S Ec E aes se T a oO ot cce 30 ES E 62 OE 2 3 3 fo Parameters 7 1 Communication with CC Link Safety Master Module T 1 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC LES res 7 3 Communication with CC Link IE Controller Network Module or MELSECNET H Module Communication between the CPU module and the CC Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module is performed by link refresh To execute link refresh the refresh parameters need to be set on the of Network parameter in GX Developer For details on the network parameter setting items refer to Section 8 2 4 POINT When a CC Link IE Controller Network module or MELSECNET H module is used with a safety CPU module the functions that can be used are restricted For details on restrictions refer to Appendix 4 and 5 For detail
222. n the program that achieves the safety function In the program that achieves the safety function only SM1000 to SM1799 can be used eeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 8 For details on special relays which can be used by the CPU module refer to Appendix 1 9 32 9 3 Internal System Devices 9 3 1 Special relay SM Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em 9 3 2 Special register SD 1 Definition A special register is used to store CPU module status data error diagnostics and system information c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a 2 Special register classifications Special registers are classified according to their applications as shown in Table9 6 Table9 6 Special register classification list Classification Special register Diagnostics information SDO to SD99 System information D200 to SD399 System clock system counter SD400 to SD499 Scan information SD500 to SD559 Safety CPU SD560 to SD599 Memory SD600 to SD699 CC Link Safety SD1000 to SD1299 CC Link IE Field Network SD1400 to SD1799 CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module 3 Special register that can be used in the program that achieves the safety function In the program that achieves the safety function only SD1000 to SD1799 can be used For details on special registers refer to Appendix 2 Appendices Index 9 3 Internal System Dev
223. ning SD5 Error classification 5 SD6 Error item 5 SD7 Link ID SD8 Station No SD9 System area 1 SD10 System area 2 SD11 System area 3 SD12 System area 4 SD13 System area 5 SD14 System area 6 SD15 System area 7 5 For details on the error classification and error item refer to the manuals for the connected devices 10 Module No Station No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No SD6 I O No SD7 Station No SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Empty SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 11 CC Link IE Field Network information Number Meaning SD5 Error classification 6 SD6 Error item 6 SD7 Network No SD8 Station No SD9 System area 1 SD10 System area 2 SD11 System area 3 SD12 System area 4 SD13 System area 5 SD14 System area 6 SD15 System area 7 6 For details on the error classification and error item refer to the manuals for the connected devices If the QSCPU is connected 350 is stored as the error classification and the error code of the transfer target is stored as the error item Appendix 2 Special Register List Set by When set S Error AG Qs em Corresponding CPU Qs APPENDICES MELSEC ES erie
224. nits END SD540 processing time Stores the time fom when the scan program ends until the i A next scan starts into SD540 and SD541 END in 1 ms units i g Measurement is made in 100 ys units SE END oe END SD540 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 6553 Every S processing time SD541 Stores the s place Storage range 0 to 900 Spes in 100 us The accuracy of END processing time is 0 1ms units Constant scan Stores the wait time for constant scan setting into SD542 and SD542 wait time in 1 SD543 Constant 3 A E ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units S Every END be Constant scan SD542 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 6553 y SD543 wait time in SD543 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 100 us units e The accuracy of constant scan wait time is 0 1ms Scan program Stores the execution time of a scan program during one scan SD548 3 execution time into SD548 and SD549 can in 1 ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units program Scan program SD548 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 6553 S Every END execution g execution time SD549 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 SD549 time in 100 ws Stored every scan units e The accuracy of scan program execution time is 0 1ms App 18 Appendix 2 Special Register List Corresponding CPU Corresponding CPU APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie 5 Safety
225. nment Safety setting Label Comment Acknowledge XY assignment Detaut End Cancel Diagram 8 1 PLC name Table8 1 PLC name list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Set the label name application of the CPU module Set th t of the CPU Comment 0001 Steet eee Max 64 characters No setting module label Label 0000 Max 10 characters No setting 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 2 Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intelligent Function Module Performance Specification Memories and Files Overview 1 O Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Functions g o 2 a E E a 8 PARAMETERS 2 PLC system Make the settings necessary to use the CPU module The parameters may be the default values to perform control QS Parameter PLC name PLC system Puc RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting Timer limit setting Low 100 ms 1ms 1000ms speed High fioo ms 0 1ms 100ms speed Points occupied by empty slot RUN PAUSE contacts RUN X X0 X1 7FF ma Remote reset Iv Allow Output mode at STOP to RUN Previous state C Recalculate output is 1 scan later fie x Points Ea AG QS ie Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check Cancel End Diagram 8 2 PLC system Table8 2 PLC s
226. nnection with improperly designed incompatible or defective hardware or software 5 that fails because consumable parts such as batteries backlights or fuses were not tested serviced or replaced 6 operated or used with equipment production lines or systems that do not meet applicable and commensurate legal safety and industry accepted standards 7 operated or used in abnormal applications 8 installed operated or used in contravention of instructions precautions or warnings contained in MELCO s user instruction and or safety manuals technical bulletins and guidelines for the Products 9 used with obsolete technologies or technologies not fully tested and widely accepted and in use at the time of the Product s manufacture 10 subjected to excessive heat or moisture abnormal voltages shock excessive vibration physical damage or other improper environment or 11 damaged or malfunctioning due to Acts of God fires acts of vandals criminals or terrorists communication or power failures or any other cause or failure that results from circumstances beyond MELCO s control f All Product information and specifications contained on MELCO s website and in catalogs manuals or technical information materials provided by MELCO are subject to change without prior notice g The Product information and statements contained on MELCO s website and in catalogs manuals technical bulletins or other materials provided by MELCO are prov
227. nt Function Module Performance Specification Memories and Files Overview 1 O Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Functions g o 2 D E E a PARAMETERS MELSEC LES ries 8 Safety settings Set the operation settings in continuous RUN in test mode and for remote station error status QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignmen Continuous RUN in test mode Continuous RUN of tolerance time 10 s Operation settings during CC Link Safety remote station error Stop z Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check End Cancel Diagram 8 8 Safety settings Table8 8 Safety settings Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Set the continuous RUN Continuous RUN in test F tolerance time in TEST MODE 1 second to 86400 seconds 10 seconds Section 6 5 mode Operation settings during 6000 CC Link Safety remote station error Set the operation settings for Stop Continue Stop fists remote station errors 8 9 8 1 PLC Parameters 8 PARAMETERS MELSEC LES ies 8 2 Network Parameters This section shows the list of network parameters and explains the details of each z x Z parameter setting item 8 E Definition of mn M N in the Parameter No column mn M N in the Parameter No column in this section indicate the following mn Ind
228. ntals Instructions S22 Inspection 7 5 L N O W Seer Users Manual QSCPU User s Manual QSCPU Programming Hardware Design A P Purpose g Function Explanation Manual Common Maintenance and 5 a Program Fundamentals Instruction iS inspection 5 3 Confirmation of part names and 3 specifications of the CPU module m 2 Outline o Confirmation of connection methods for the power supply module and base 3 unit gs 2 Construction of the single CPU S system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number E E a5 assignment i Confirmation of the sequence program configuration and memory Details Confirmation of the functions parameters and devices of the CPU 5 module ira Pa e Confirmation of the troubleshooting and error codes Details 6 53 SL Confirmation of usage of sequence z Bo nstruciions basic Instructions Details 5 3 application instructions etc 2 g oO 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC LES eres 1 1 Features The QS series CPU module has the following new features 1 Safety programmable controller system can be constructed The QS series CPU module has acquired certification of the highest safety level SIL3 of IEC 61508 Category 4 of EN 654 1 and Category 4 performance level e of EN ISO 13849 1 applicable to programmable controllers Power supply CPU CC Link Safety master module Power supply CPU CC Link Safety master module CC Link IE Field Network m
229. nted For slots for which empty is set in the PLC parameter I O assignment even if a module is mounted the module name is not displayed Parameter status The I O numbers module type and points for the each slot of the base unit can be checked If an assignment error or empty 0 is displayed for the operation status the PLC parameter I O assignment is different from the loading status Match the PLC parameter I O assignments to the loading status Base The state of the mounted modules and the base unit can be checked When even one error module exists the module column becomes the state color for that module Diagnostics This function is used to confirm the status of the CPU module and errors 6 64 6 17 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 5 Module s detailed information This is used to check detailed information on the selected module For detailed information on intelligent function modules refer to the manual for each intelligent function module Overview 6 Base information Enables the Overall Information and Base Information to be confirmed a Overall information Enables the number of base units in use and the number of modules mounted on the base units to be confirmed Performance Specification b Base information Enables the base name the number of slots the base type and the number of modules mounted onto the base for the selected base unit to
230. ntelligent function module are refreshed by I O refresh The I O refresh is executed before the sequence program operation starts Overview 3 3 3 END processing This is a post processing to return the sequence program execution to step 0 after completing the whole sequence program operation processing once The END processing includes the following e Self diagnostic processing gt Section 6 7 e Communication with external device such as GX Developer e Processing of instructions dedicated to intelligent function modules e CC Link IE Field Network refresh processing e CC Link IE Controller Network refresh processing e MELSECNETHH refresh processing e CC Link Safety refresh processing e Constant wait processing e Watchdog timer reset processing lt gt Section 6 15 e Setting values in the special relays special registers in the set timing END processing gt Appendix 1 Appendix 2 POINT When the constant scan function gt Section 6 9 is set the result of END processing is retained during the waiting time after the END processing or before the next scan Performance Specification oO 2 3 e CUS oa es E Sco a20 o o S css TF GEQ Box now 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 3 3 Operation Processing 3 8 3 3 2 I O refresh 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXEC
231. ntroller When data program change or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running safety programmable controller create an interlock circuit outside the sequence program and safety programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely For the operations to a safety programmable controller pay full attention to safety by reading the relevant manuals carefully and establishing the operating procedure Furthermore for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a safety CPU module the corrective actions against a communication error due to a cable connection fault etc should be predetermined as a system Design Precautions WARNING All output signals from a safety CPU module to the CC Link Safety master module are prohibited to use These signals can be found in the CC Link Safety System Master Module User s Manual Do not turn ON or OFF these signals by sequence program since turning ON OFF these output signals of the programmable controller system may cause malfunctions and safety operation cannot be guaranteed All output signals from a safety CPU module to the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions are prohibited to use These signals can be found in the MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local User s Manual Do not turn ON or OFF these signals by sequence program since turning ON OFF these output signals of the programmab
232. ntroller Network Sold separately Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Explains the specifications procedures and settings before operation parameter settings programming and troubleshooting of CC Link IE Controller Network Sold separately Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic Explains the specifications procedures for data communication with external devices line connection open close fixed buffer communication random access buffer communication and troubleshooting of the Ethernet module Sold separately SH 080668ENG 13JV16 SH 080049 13JF92 SH 080009 13JL88 Manual Number Model Code Manual Name Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Explains the e mail function programmable controller CPU status monitoring function communication function via CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 communication function using the data i G link instructions file transfer function FTP server of the Ethernet module Sold separately MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Explains the communication methods and control procedures using the MC protocol which is used by external SH 080008 devices to read and write data of the programmable controller CPU via the serial communication module or 13JF89 Ethernet module Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Expla
233. occurs the CPU may not write to the ROM which needs to replace the CPU module Overview 1 Method for checking the ROM write count The ROM write count is stored in special registers SD232 and SD233 The current ROM write count can be checked by monitoring special registers SD232 and SD233 Also if the ROM write count exceeds 100 000 special relay SM232 turns ON Performance Specification Table6 10 ROMwrite count check special relay and special registers Special relay Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions special register Description Remark number SM232 Turns ON if the ROM write count exceeds 100 000 D232 The ROM write count continues to be The ROM write count is stored as a binary value D233 y stored even if it exceeds 100 000 1 0 Nunber Assignment 2 Operation counted as ROM writes Below are the operations counted as a ROM write a Writing parameters or program to the standard ROM There are two types of writing parameters and programs to ROM e Writing program memory to ROM using GX Developer e Writing program memory to ROM when switching from TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files b Registering the CPU access password from GX Developer c PLC memory initialization Es POINT 1 The following shows the count value at the time of writing to ROM e Writing the program memory to ROM 6 e Registration change of the CPU access passwor
234. ocessing To create a program with the CPU module the program capacity the number of device points used etc must be determined in advance 1 Program size considerations Consider whether a program can be stored within the program capacity that can be executed with CPU modules 14 k steps or not s Section 5 3 3 2 3 gei o a 8 2 E d D a D Ez amp p 5 3 Q is B a 2 Applications of devices and setting of their numbers of points Consider the applications of the devices used in a program and their number of points gt CHAPTER 9 Appendices 3 Boot operation considerations When boot operation is executed in TEST MODE set the PLC parameter boot file settings In SAFETY MODE execute boot run regardless of the PLC parameter boot file settings Section 5 1 4 L gt Section 11 3 Index 11 1 Items to be examined for program creation 1 1 1 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE MELSEC LES erie 11 2 Procedure for writing program This section explains the procedure for writing the parameters and program created by GX Developer to the CPU module This section explains the procedure for writing a program to the program memory 3 Section 5 1 2 When storing a program in standard ROM and booting in TEST MODE execute the procedure in 11 3 after executing the procedure in this item Procedural steps shown in LA boxes are performed a
235. odule z TableApp 24 lists the functions of Ethernet and their availability in the safety CPU 4 module 8 TableApp 24 List of Ethernet functions and their availability in the safety CPU module E 7 Using 4E frame o 2 Communication using the 3 Using QnA compatible 3E frame O 8 MC protocol 2 Using A compatible 1E frame O A Communication using the fixed buffer Procedure exist O 3 Communication using the fixed buffers No procedure O aE Communication using the random access buffer x Sending receiving e mail x Establishing disconnecting a connection with an external device of oe which data communication is performed OPEN CLOSE 9 Reading receive data writing send data using fixed buffer ge communication BUFRCV BUFSND 9 E Reading receive data using fixed buffer communication for interrupt gg programs BUFRCVS 3 Clearing reading error information of the Ethernet module ERRCLR ERRRD 2 Communication using Reinitializaton of the Ethernet module UINI dedicated instructions Reading sending e mails from to other stations MRECV MSEND x 9 Reading writing data from to word device on another station READ 07 i SREAD WRITE SWRITE 2 Reading writing data from to word device on another station ZNRD ZNWR i Sending receiving data SEND RECV Receiving data on another station for interrupt program RECVS Clock data read write om Transient request to another station REQ Remote RUN STOP x1 3 File transfer FTP server function
236. of GX Developer App 42 Module Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie c 2 CLOSE instruction i C Fig App 2 shows a program example where buffer memory addresses are replaced 3 i with I O signals in the program for closing the connection No 1 g 8 TableApp 31 Buffer memory address I O signal correspondence Buffer memory address i O signal 2 in hexadecimal decimal f 50004 20480 Open completion signal X10 Connection 1 open completion 3 no Z When the I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F Re OF lt lt lt Close processing of connection No 1 gt gt gt X10 7 J 0 PLF M160 7 pe Connection 2 3 open sora ima 2 signal 5 Re M160 M150 B z o ot PLS M161 35 zi oD C ti Ci ti pe jasso SARS Teose ca timing normal processing completion from the external M6000 device 25 PLS M2000 Close Close instruction instruction 1PLS m 8 M2000 X10 2 2 o 283 ZP CLOSE UO K1 D200 M200 Eq Close Connection CLOSE instruction 1 open instruction 1PLS completion completion signal device M161 M210 a j SET M210 7 Connection CLOSE CLOSE 1 close A instruction instruction processing in execution in execution fromthe 3 external device O M200 M201 a 45 f SET M202 J CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE instruction instruction
237. of I O points are the same Table4 1 describes the operations performed when the mounted module type differs from the one in the I O assignment setting 2 Table4 1 List of operations performed when mounted module differs from I O assignment I O assignment Mounted module i Result setting Empty slot Intelli Empty slot All modules Empty Empty slot 4 3 I O Assignment by GX Developer 4 3 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC LES res 3 Last I O number In I O assignment set the last I O number not to exceed the maximum value CHAPTER 2 of the I O points An error MODULE LAYOUT ERROR will occur if the last I O number exceeds the maximum value of the I O points System monitor of GX Developer shows as an I O address b Precautions for automatic start XY assignment by CPU module When the start XY is not yet entered the CPU module automatically assigns it In the case of 1 or 2 below therefore the start XY setting of each slot may overlap the one assigned by the CPU module 1 Settings of 1 O numbers were exchanged in the start XY 2 There are slots with start XY setting and those without start XY setting automatically assigned slot The following example Diagram 4 4 shows overlapping start XY QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Bootfile 1 0 assignment Safety setting 1 0 Assignment
238. of distinguished neutrals Judgment upon the award rendered by the Arbitrator shall be final and binding and may be entered by any court having jurisdiction thereof The place of the arbitration shall be New York City New York The language of the arbitration shall be English The neutral organization designated to perform the functions specified in Rule 6 and Rules 7 7 b 7 8 and 7 9 shall be the CPR Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080627ENG SH NA 080627ENG 1205 MEE MODEL QSCPU U KP E MODEL CODE 13JR93 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
239. oints 7 indicating the sp151 0 0 0 0 0 0 xY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 SD152 1 0 module modules with a Roe tea nti tes tea ca oo na a S Error as verify error verify errors Sp153 0 GEO a a a a i 0 No I O verify t Indicates an I O module verify error errors If a module has more than 16 I O points the I O module 1 IO verify number in units of 16 points corresponds to the start 16 I O D153 error present points turns on App 14 Example When a module with 64 I O points is mounted in slot 0 only bO turns on when an error is detected Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Appendix 2 Special Register List APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie 2 System information fe 2 TableApp 12 Special register E A Set b Cc di g Number Name Meaning Explanation when a OD os 3 The CPU switch status is stored in the following format b15 to b4 b3 to pO fi D lt a gt z Status of Stat f CPU 3 Sp200m 20S 0 n Empty 1 S Every END 8 switch switch ie o 0 RUN 3 1 CPU switch status 1 STOP 2 RESET ae OE The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU module O is off 1 is on and 2 is flicker o 3 b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bO 23 T T T T T T T 25 SD201 LED status SS of Se oe oea pees eo CPU L
240. on No lt gt IP information Necessary settingl No setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Abeady set Start 1 0 No Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Assignment image Diagram 8 11 Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards screen for Ethernet setting Table8 13 List of Ethernet setting items Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Number of Ethernet 9000 Starting I O No QNO0n Network No Group No 09mnu Station No Mode QNO0H Set the network parameters for Refer to the Ethernet manual peen the Ethernet Operational settings Initial settings QNO1H Open settings 9NO2n Router relay parameter QNO3H i lt gt ae oN Routing parameters QNO4H 8 13 8 2 Network Parameters PARAMETERS MELEGEN res 4 CC Link setting Set the CC Link parameters S O E Network parameters Setting the CC Link list E No of boards in module 1 zi Boards Blank no setting 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational settin Operational settings Type Safety master station X Station No 0 Oe Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start
241. on with Module Parameters 5 3 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions 5 16 5 3 1 File operation D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSEC LES erie 5 3 3 Memory capacities of files When using the program memory or standard ROM calculate the rough size of each file according to Table5 4 Table5 4 Memory capacity calculation for files Function Rough file capacity unit byte Drive heading 70 Parameter Default 316 increases depending on the parameter setting Reference Boot setting 100 e CC Link IE Field Network setting made parameter size when Master station Safety or Local station Safety is set parameter size of the module size of routing setting e Parameter size when Master station Safety is set Max 5562 e Parameter size when Local station Safety is set Max 2770 e Parameter size of the module Max 6058 e Size of routing setting 6 8 x number of routing settings e CC Link IE Controller Network setting made Max 998 increased MELSECNET H setting made Max 226 increased e Ethernet setting made Max 896 increased e CC Link Safety setting made 22 606 x number of safety master modules 76 x number of safety remote stations 4 x number of safety remote station parameter settings Remote password setting made gt 70 20 number of target modules x 10 Max 170 increased Sequ
242. onds time out check is done after 180 seconds If an error occurs extend the time out on Connection setup Execute copying program memory data into ROM Click the OK button MELSOFT series GX Developer i Switch to safety mode completed Check the condition of connection device and restart or reset PLC Y Checking completion of the switch to SAFETY MODE Click the button SAFETY MODE wait for restart You can return to TEST MODE by switching the safety CPU operation mode using GX Developer enables to return to the TEST MODE Switch to safety CPU operation mode Current operation mode Restart up Reset the CPU module or restart up the safety programmable controller system power C Completed Diagram 6 5 TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE switching continued 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 11 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching Overview Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files o Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS 6 12 b SAFETY MODE to TEST MODE switching Diagram 6 6 shows the procedure for SAFETY MODE to TEST MODE switching using GX Developer 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode Start ELS AG Seri
243. ontroller again For details on how to initialize the PLC memory refer to Section 6 4 3 The CPU access password can be registered to the CPU module in the following cases e CPU operation mode TEST MODE e CPU operation status STOP status 4 Seta different CPU access password for each CPU module 6 3 CPU access password 6 FUNCTIONS M BIRS AG eX ics 6 4 PLC memory initialization 1 What PLC memory initialization is PLC memory initialization erases user data written in the CPU module When you initialize the PLC memory data is returned to its factory settings Overview After PLC memory initialization is executed the system automatically resets cancels the reset then the initialization processing is executed again Performance Specification This selects execution of PLC The QSCPU initializes the program memory standard memory initialization with GX ROM CPU access password the operation error Developer history and the clock data The QSCPU automatically resets and cancels the reset Program memory Erase data Execute PLC memory initialization ao Standard ROM Erase data Ma ama OP100 POWER ON 2200 MISSING PARAMETER gt Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions iy CPU access Set to no password password After initialization to 0 incidents record the operation history i en oN Operation and error
244. operation mode switching SAFETY MODE wait for restart to TEST MODE Safety CPU operation mode switching TEST MODE to SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE wait for restart Diagram 6 3 State when the safety CPU operation mode is switched POINT 1 Safety CPU operation mode information is retained by the CPU module battery When using the CPU module connect the battery included in the CPU module 2 Programs cannot be executed in SAFETY MODE wait for restart Even if the RUN STOP RESET switch is operated STOP RUN ora remote RUN is executed from GX Developer the safety CPU module does not go into the Run status 3 Inthe following cases the unit starts up in TEST MODE The first power on after the unit is purchased e When the safety CPU operation mode became unstable due to low battery The operation contents OP001 SYSTEM INITIALIZE OPERATION MODE are stored in the operation error history 6 4 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 1 Safety CPU operation mode 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES eries 6 2 2 Checking safety CPU operation mode The safety CPU operation mode of the CPU module can be checked with the following methods e Checking with the LEDs on the front of the CPU module e Checking with the GX Developer online operation screen e Checking with a special relay or a special register 1 Checking with the LEDs on the front of the CPU module The current safety CPU operation mode can be chec
245. operation processing at switch operation Table3 1 Operation processing at switch operation Sequence RUN STOP program status operation processing CPU module operation processing External output MELSEC LES erie Device memory Y Saves the output Y Saves the output Y Executes up to Saves the device memory f status immediately status immediately the END Bo status immediately before ct fe RUN STOP before switching to the o before switching to instruction and switching to the STOP STOP status and turns the STOP status and stops i status all points OFF turns all points OFF aenea Determined by the etermine e gt y STOP RUN time STOP RUN time Uses the device memory a output mode in the STOP RUN Starts at step 0 output mode in the status when the CPU module PLC parameter PLC parameter dialog had been set to STOP status _ dialog box box Section 6 10 POINT The CPU module performs the following in any of RUN and STOP status I O refresh processing e Refresh processing of network modules Self diagnostic processing e Communication processing with external devices such as GX Developer e Intelligent function module dedicated instruction processing only completion processing Even in the STOP status the CPU module can perform the following operations e I O monitor and test operation with GX Developer e Reading data from external dev
246. opers When remote operations are performed from the same GX Developer the status of the remote operation that is executed last will be effective 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Memories and Files a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 12 Remote Operation 6 53 6 12 3 Relationship of remote operation and CPU s RUN STOP status 6 FUNCTIONS 6 54 MELSECIEN res 6 13 Monitor Function 1 2 Definition of Monitoring Function This is a function to read the program device and intelligent function module status of the CPU module by using GX Developer The monitor functions that can be executed are shown below e Ladder monitor e Device buffer memory batch monitor e Device registration monitor e Device test e Program monitor list e Ladder registration monitor For details on GX Developer monitor functions refer to the following manual e GX Developer Operating Manual Monitor request processing timing and displayed data The CPU module performs the END processing to handle monitor requests from GX Developer The results of CPU module END processing are displayed on the GX Developer side 6 13 Monitor Function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES res 6 14 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN With the CPU module writing during RUN is possible in ladder mode Overview 6 14 1 Online change in ladder mode 1 Wri
247. orresponding When set CPU When a continuation error occurs the corresponding bits are all set to ON Canceling the error starting up the safety programmable controller power or canceling the safety CPU module reset after eliminating the cause of the error makes the bits go OFF Bit No Name of the cause 0 Instantaneous power failure 1 Battery low 2 Standard ROM write count excess 3 TEST MODE continuous RUN tolerance timeout 4 Scan timeout 5 Annunciator ON Cause of 6 Safety remote station detection error SD81 error Cause of error Safety communication target station detection error S Error QS 7 Safety remote station product information mismatch Safety station product information mismatch 8 Initial monitoring timeout error Safety monitoring timeout error Error monitoring timeout error 9 Safety remote station data split error Safety remote command error Safety remote station link ID error Safety remote station running number error Safety remote station reception data error Safety station reception data error Safety connection setting error 10 to 15 Empty fixed to 0 When an I O module whose information is different from the SD150 one registered at power on is detected the corresponding I O module number in units of 16 points is stored The I O module number set in parameter is stored if it is set D151 Bit pattern in b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Unite ai te sD150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e p
248. ostics description Diagnostics timing Error occurring when error is detected Error code ror message Overview At power ON 1131 1132 1133 i At reset 1136 1137 SS 1 RAM diagnostics Checks that the CPU module internal memory rese RAM ERROR 2 is not corrupted sAiwavs 1141 1142 1143 Eg 7 1146 3 At power ON a Checks that the firmware stored in the ROM is ica 2 F W diagnostics During execution 8060 INCORRECT FIRMWARE not corrupted of the END A instruction Fa S At power ON a 5 g METAAN Checks that the operation circuit which At reset 290 Operation circuit i i i 825 3 anoi performs sequence program operations During execution 1210 OPERATION CIRCUIT ERROR BSS g operates correctly of the END Fas g instruction a At power ON 8031 Checks that files stored in the program memo aS 4 Program verity prag Y F During execution INCORRECT FILE z are not corrupted o of the END 8032 E instruction HA lt D ti pa l Checks that the operation results output from e ron in SAFETY OUTPUT VERIFY 5 e x the CPU A and B match i ERROR 2 instruction 5 Always 8020 6 Emono Checks that the CPU A and B have the same During execution CPU A amp B CAN T BE g OS execution status of the END 8021 SYNCHRONIZED instruction Z At power ON 8000 INTERNAL REGISTER 8 At reset ERROR eR 3 2 Checks that registers used in the CPU module pas P 7 M
249. otation uses the numerals 0 through 9 When counting beyond 9 a 1 is placed in the 10s column and a 0 is placed in the 1s column to make the number 10 In binary notation the numerals 0 and 1 are used A carry occurs after 1 and the number becomes 10 decimal 2 Table3 4 shows the numerical notation by BIN and DEC Overview Performance Specification Table3 4 Comparison between Binary and Decimal Notations DEC Decimal BIN Binary 3 0 0000 1 0001 2 Carry sus 2 0010 lt 952 3 0011 See Garry 53 4 0100 Eg 5 0101 Sdn 6 0110 7 0111 es Carry S 8 1000 E 9 1001 2 10 1010 E 11 1011 6 2 Binary numeric expression a Bit configuration in BIN notation used in CPU module Each CPU module register data registers link registers etc consists of 16 bits ER b Numeric data available for CPU module 83 Each CPU module register can store numeric values of 32768 to 32767 5 Diagram 3 11 shows the numeric notation for CPU module registers Most significant bit for positive negative discrimination Bit name gt b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 3 215 214 213 212 21 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 T I Il ll Il Il I Il I Il ll ll ll Il Il I Decimal value 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 Negative value when most significant bit is 1 c Diagram 3 11
250. ount S38 Automatic reconnection LE station count CNM24 Scan mode setting Station information setting Parameters 8 2 Network Parameters 8 14 8 PARAMETERS M BLS 26 Series 8 3 Remote Password This section shows the list of remote password related parameters and explains the details of each parameter setting item Remote password detail settings Remote password settings User connection No Password settings g I Connection 4 I Connection 8 I Connection 12 I Connection 16 I Connection 3 I Connection 7 I Connection 11 I Connection 15 Characters that can be used in password M Connection 1 J Connection 2 m 4 characters Numbers A Z a z Special characters I Connection 6 J Connection 10 I Connection 14 I Connection 5 I Connection 9 I Connection 13 Password Password active module settings Note Please enable the existence confirmation function in case of using the UDP IP protocol Model name 0J71E71 System connection tl 7 GX Developer transmission port TCP IP GX Developer transmission port UDP IP Dedicated instruction CC IE Control MNET 10 H relay transmission port r If you enable the remote password the dedicated instructions and the CC IE Control MNET 10 H relay transmission function can not be used If the remote password of the port is enabled the existence confirmation function will be enabled automatically
251. prevent the above it is recommended to insert the N C contact of the OUT CO instruction as the execution condition of the RST CO instruction so that the coil of CO does not turn OFF while the execution condition MO of the OUT CO instruction is ON Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Modified ladder example MO K10 co co MO HeH Rs co Diagram 9 30 Counter resetting ladder example recommended example Appendices d Maximum counting speed The counter can count only when the input condition ON OFF time is longer than the execution interval of the corresponding OUT C instruction The maximum counting speed is calculated by the following expression n Duty 1 Maximum counting _ N _ limes s Index T Execution interval of the OUT C instruction speed Cmax 100 sec 1 The duty is the count input signal s ON OFF time ratio expressed as a percentage value T2 T1 T2 11 T1 T2 When T1 27T2 n x100 When T1 lt T2 n x100 T1 T2 z T Count input signal ee Diagram 9 31 Duty ratio 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 27 9 2 9 Counter C Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSECIEN res 9 2 10 Data register D 1 Definition Data registers are memory devices which store numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFH 2 Bit configuration of data register a Bit configuration and read and write units Data registers which con
252. r Name Meanin Explanation s k When set CPU When an error is detected and an interlock is activated the bit corresponding to the error station turns to 1 b15 b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO D1700 16 15 to 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SD1701 32 31 to 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 SD1700 Safety station 0 Not SD1702 48 47 to 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 a S Status to interlock interlocked SD1703 64 63 to 158 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 qs f change SD1707 status 1 Interlocked sp1704 80 79 to 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 SD1705 96 95 to 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 D1706 112 111 to 106 105 104 103 102 101100 99 98 97 D1707 to 1201191181171116 115 114 113 1 to 120 in the table indicate station numbers Fixed to 0 The interlock status of a safety station is released when the 0 I O interlock corresponding bit in this register is changed from 0 to 1 of safety i b15 b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO station on CC Link IE SD1720 16 15 t 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 24 Field SD1721 32 31 to 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 p1720 Safety station Network not D1722 48 47 to 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 o interlock fee D1723 64 63 to 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 U Request as release 1 I O interlock SD1727 reques
253. r measurement value Diagram 6 11 Measurement period for continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE 1 The continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE is not measured during operation in SAFETY MODE 2 Measurement of the continuous RUN time in TEST MODE continues even if the operating time in TEST MODE exceeds the set continuous RUN tolerance time and the TEST MODE TIME EXCEEDED error code 8100 continuation error occurs eeeeeoeeceeoe eee eeeoeeeoeoeoseeeoeeeeeoeseeeeeeeeeeoeeeoeeeeeeee ee a 2 3 Le Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 5 Setting to prevent continuous RUN in TEST MODE 6 25 6 FUNCTIONS MEL SEC LOS cries 3 Setting the TEST MODE continuous RUN tolerance time The continuous RUN tolerance time in TEST MODE is set with the PLC parameter safety setting screen QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting Setting the continuous RUN tolerance time in TEST MODE Coreen BUNT es mege e Settable range 1 to 86400 1 to 86 400 seconds Continuous RUN of tolerance time T0 s Default 10 10 seconds Operatioin settigns during remote station error Continue v Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check End Cancel Diagram 6 12 PLC parameter safety setting screen 4 Checking the continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE The continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE is stored in
254. r that retains the current value even when a timer coil switches OFF Timers Timers _ Low speed timers L High speed timers Retentive Low speed retentive timers timers High speed retentive timers Diagram 9 17 Timer types How to use timers With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed timer or high speed timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed timer With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed retentive timer or high speed retentive timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed retentive timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed retentive timer Low speed timers a Definition Low speed timers perform counting in 1 to 1000ms units The timer is valid only while its coil is ON The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out occurs When the timer s coil switches OFF the current value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF Ladder example X100 K10 When X100 switches ON the TO coil switches ON and TO the contact switches ON 1 second later The low speed timer measures time in 100 ms units Time chart X100 TO coil TO contact Diagram 9 18 Ladder example and timing chart of low speed t
255. r the processing time of each instruction refer to the following manual lt gt QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Execution time of various functions processed at END The execution time of various functions processed at END is the sum of times required for calendar update and error clear a Calendar update processing time This indicates the time taken to change read the clock data at END processing when the clock data set request SM210 changes from OFF to ON or the clock data read request SM213 turns ON is issued Table10 1 Calendar update processing time END processing time When clock data set request When clock data read request is issued is issued 0 10ms 0 02ms CPU module b Error clear processing This indicates the time taken to clear the continuation error stored in SD50 when SM50 error clear rises changes from OFF to ON Table10 2 Error clear processing time CPU module Error clear processing time QS001CPU 0 13ms 10 1 Scan Time 10 1 2 Time required for each processing included in scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME M aL 26 SS 4 Service processing time Service processing is the processing for communication with GX Developer and external devices e Monitoring by GX Developer Processing times required for monitoring by GX Developer are shown below Device Explanation i Table10 3 Monitor processing time by GX Developer Read from PLC 5 6ms
256. ram memory formatting 5 3 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 2 Program memory D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M LS 26 SS b Create a user setting system area When formatting the program memory set the user setting system area capacity 1 Do not create a user setting system area The program memory is formatted without the user setting system area being created Overview 2 Create a user setting system area The user setting system area is created during formatting There are the following user setting system areas Table5 3 Performance Specification Table5 3 User setting system area type System area type Description Online change area of Setting this area enables multiple blocks of data to be changed online multiple blocks Refer to the following manual for the number of blocks to which online FE Online change area of change can be made in this area setting E FB definition CF GX Developer Operating Manual EE 36 ti E POINT When the user setting system area is created the available area decreases by the number of created area steps The memory capacity can be checked from the Read from PLC screen of GX Developer gt 3 c in this section 1 0 Nunber Assignment ol 2 3 3 fe oO Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x n 2 T ke oO n A fe E v Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters
257. rameter No SD16 No SD17 SD17 SD18 SD18 SD19 SD19 SD20 SD20 SD21 SD21 SD24 3022 Empty SD2 Empty SD23 D23 SD24 SD24 SD25 SD25 SD26 SD26 9 Error information SD25 Number Meaning SD16 Error information 1 SD17 Error information 2 SD18 Error information 3 SD19 Error information 4 SD20 Error information 5 SD21 Error information 6 SD26 SD22 Error information 7 SD23 Error information 8 SD24 Error information 9 SD25 Error information 10 SD26 Error information 11 Appendix 2 Special Register List App 11 APPENDICES Number SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 App 12 Error individual information Meaning Error individual information TableApp 10 Special register Explanation 10 CC Link Safety information Number Meaning SD16 Number of items for individual information SD17 individual information 1 SD18 individual information 2 SD19 individual information 3 SD20 individual information 4 SD21 individual information 5 SD22 individual information 6 SD23 individual information 7 SD24 individual information 8 SD25 individual information 9 SD26 individual information 10 11 Program abort information Zz mber Meaning D16 Abort code 5 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 0na njn nnn HM n Empty
258. rammable controller is used stand alone e Network parameters 3 Section 8 2 This parameter is set when the intelligent function module is used in the programmable controller system e Remote password This parameter is set when the remote password function of the Ethernet module is used 2 Parameter setting method Set the parameters by GX Developer Refer to the following manual for the setting operation on GX Developer For details on basic operations using GX Developer refer to the following manual GX Developer Operating Manual 4 POINT In GX Developer since the functions are not available to the CPU module being used it is not necessary to set the setting items displayed in gray cannot be selected that are not explained in this section e When an error occurs in the parameter setting the corresponding parameter No indicated in the tables of this chapter is stored into the special register SD16 to 26 Refer to Appendix 3 for the list of the parameter No e Refer to CHAPTER 11 for the parameter reflection procedure 8 PARAMETERS M aL 26 Qs ies 8 1 PLC Parameters This section shows the list of PLC parameters and explains the details of each parameter setting item 1 PLC name Set the label and comment of the used CPU module Setting the label and comment in the PLC name does not affect the actual operation QS Parameter PLC name PLc system PLC RAS Device Boot file 1 0 assig
259. re 5 7 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 3 Standard ROM D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELEGEN res 4 Write to standard ROM For details on writing to the standard ROM refer to Section 5 1 4 3 EJPOINT The file size has the minimum unit gt Section 5 3 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual file size Overview 5 How to use the program stored in the standard ROM Since operation cannot be executed by the program stored in the standard ROM use that program by booting reading it to the program memory L gt Section 5 1 4 Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment ol 2 3 3 fe o Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x n 2 T ke oO n A fe E v Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 8 5 1 3 Standard ROM D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE M aL 26 NS 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing 1 Standard ROM program execution boot run a Standard ROM program execution The CPU module performs operation of the program stored in the program memory It does not operate the program stored in the standard ROM The program stored in the standard ROM is booted read to the program memory to perform operation Program
260. re written to the standard ROM by batch copying them to the standard ROM Overview a Before write Check the following points before writing the files to the standard ROM 1 Saving the standard ROM files When files are written to the standard ROM all files previously stored in the standard ROM are automatically deleted Before writing files to the standard ROM choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer and save the stored files using GX Developer in advance Performance Specification 2 Preparation of files to be written Since all files stored in the standard ROM are automatically deleted when files n i are to be written to the standard ROM prepare all files to be stored in FE advance 58 BBs i EE b Write procedure z 8 N O W The procedure to write files to the standard ROM will be explained 1 Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Copy program memory data into ROM on GX Developer 2 The Write the program memory to ROM screen appears Copy program memory data into ROM 1 0 Nunber Assignment All data in program memory will be written into the target Execute Target Standard ROM fd Close ol The memory size of the target will be changed into the same size of program memory The data written into IC Card ROM can t be read directly by Image data reading 2 E 3 fe o 8 gt Fo D 2 ae o x n T ae i o n 2 fe
261. rie b When link register is used for 32 bit instruction If the link registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data is stored in registers Wn and Wn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the link register No Wn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Wn 1 For example if link register W12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in W12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in W13 H k pmov ks00000 va Processing object W12 W13 W13 W12 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Hat cing cal Diagram 9 36 Data transfer by 32 bit instruction and storage destination Two link registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from OH to FFFFFFFFH The most significant bit in a 32 bit configuration is a sign bit 3 Holding of stored data Data stored by the link register is maintained until another data is save The data stored in the link register is initialized when the programmable controller is powered OFF or the CPU module is reset 4 POINT To use the link device in each module with the number of device points for link registers in the CPU module default 2048 points or more change the number of device points for link registers on the Device setting tab of PLC parameter 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 11 Link register W Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs
262. ring debris inside the module Such debris could cause a fire failure or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Wiring Precautions CAUTION Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a distribution terminal block Furthermore the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection For the wiring methods refer to the QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance precautions WARNING Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Turn off all phases of the external supply power used in the system when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal block mounting screws terminal screws or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Tighten
263. rogram and the CPU module is operating correctly the watchdog timer does not time out When the scan time of a sequence program is extended due to the CPU module hardware error and END instruction cannot be executed within the set watchdog timer value the watchdog timer times out 3 When watchdog timer expires When the watchdog timer expires a watchdog timer error occurs The CPU module responds to the watchdog timer error as follows 1 The CPU module turns off all outputs 2 The front mounted RUN LED turned off and the ERR LED starts flicking 3 SMO SM1 turns ON and the error code 5001 WDT ERROR is stored into SDO 6 58 6 15 Watchdog Timer WDT 6 FUNCTIONS M BIRS AG lN 4 Precautions a Watchdog timer error An error of 0 to 10 ms occurs in the measurement time of the watchdog timer Set the watchdog timer for a desired value by taking such an error into account Ex POINT 1 The scan time is the time taken for the execution of the sequence program starting from step 0 and ending at step 0 The scan time is not the same for each scan which differs according to the execution or non execution of the instructions used in the program Overview Performance Specification 2 To execute at the same scan time at every scan use the constant scan function gt Section 6 9 Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module
264. rogram is correct 4004 from STOP to RUN At power ON Checks that an END instruction exists in the At repet program At status change 4010 MISSING END INSTRUCTION from STOP to RUN During execution of an instruction checks that the ea data handed over to the instruction During ExecuNon 41004101 OPERATION ERROR PEA of the instruction 4102 meet the instruction specifications Checks that the scan time is within the WDT Always 5001 WDT ERROR setting range 26 Scan time When the constant scan time is set checks that one scan completes within the constant scan Always 5010 PROGRAM SCAN TIME OVER time 57 Operation time in TEST Checks that the continuous RUN time in TEST E Ke a Be TEST MODE TIME MODE MODE is within the setting range insiuicnan EXCEEDED 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 31 Sequence Program Configuration and Communication with Intelligent Function Module Performance Specification Memories and Files ez Overview 1 0 Nunber Assignment Execution Conditions Handled by CPU Module Functions Parameters 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LOS cries 6 7 1 LED display for error When an error occurs the LEDs on the front of the CPU module light up and flash C gt Section 6 18 6 7 2 Cancel the error The CPU module can carry out the operations canceling errors in programs as long as the error allows the program operations to continue The occurring cont
265. rograms using the FROM TO instructions with the programs using the I O signals CPU Module Processing Time TableApp 29 List of targeted dedicated instructions Dedicated instruction Function description Reference OPEN Establishes a connection 1 in this section CLOSE Disconnects a connection 2 in this section BUFRCV Reads received data for main program 3 in this section Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module BUFSND Sends data 4 in this section UINI Reinitializes the Ethernet module 5 in this section Sample programs where the intelligent function module device U Gi and the FROM TO instructions are replaced with I O signals are described below Appendices Index Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU App 41 Module APPENDICES 1 OPEN instruction Fig App 1 shows a program example where buffer memory addresses are replaced with I O signals in the program for Active opening the connection No 1 for TCP IP communication Buffer memory address TableApp 30 Buffer memory address I O signal correspondence O signal AL SEC TM eres in hexadecimal decimal 50004 20480 Open completion signal x10 Connection 1 open completion 50024 20482 Open request signal Y8 Connection 1 open request This corresponding signal cannot be used since the signal does not turn ON OFF by the OPEN instruction When t
266. ror 8332 CC LINK RECEIVED DATA ERROR Safety remote station running number error 8333 9 Safety remote station reception data error 8334 8430 Safety station reception data error 8431 CC IE RECEIVED DATA ERROR 8432 Safety connection setting error 8440 CC IE CONNECTION SETTING ERROR 6 32 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 7 1 LED display for error 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 1 Error canceling procedure Cancel an error with the following procedure Overview 1 Read out SD81 with GX Developer and check the cause of the current continuation error occurring in the CPU module 2 3 Store the canceling error code in special register SD50 4 Turn special relay SM50 OFF ON 5 Again read out SD81 with GX Developer and check that the bit corresponding to the current continuation error canceled is OFF 6 Turn special relay SM50 OFF Eliminate the cause of the error Performance Specification a Error canceling procedure for multiple errors Because the description of the error information special relays registers SMO SM1 SM5 SM16 SDO to 26 are cleared when the last error to occur the error stored in special register SDO is canceled the information on errors that have not been canceled cannot be obtained from the special relays registers Cancel errors that have not been canceled by obtaining errors that have occurred Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions in the
267. rrently set for D devices assigned for D x Numb i g SD303 vis STOT po iS Stores the number of points currently set for W devices assigned for W Number of poi D304 me lel Pos Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices assigned for SW Number of SD340 Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet modules modules mounted SD341 Ethernet I O number Indicates the I O number of mounted Ethernet module Sidni SD342 information Network number Indicates the network number of mounted Ethernet module initial D343 Group number Indicates the group number of mounted Ethernet module SD344 Station number Indicates the station number of mounted Ethernet module Appendix 2 Special Register List App 17 APPENDICES 3 System clocks counters TableApp 13 Special register MELSEC LES eres Number Name Meaning Explanation pen Number of Following programmable controller CPU module RUN 1 is D412 T sgcond counts in 1 added a cane S Status counie second units Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 change SD414 2n second 2n second Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 U clock setting clock units Setting can be made between 1 to 32767 Number of Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU D420 Scan counter counts in each module is set to RUN S Every END Number SD520 scan 4 Scan information Name Current scan Meaning Current scan
268. ry function 6 FUNCTIONS M BIRS AG lN 4 Displaying operation error history using GX Developer The contents of the operation error history can be displayed on the GX Developer PLC diagnostics screen Overview a PLC diagnostics screen display Table6 14 shows the display of the operation error history on the GX Developer PLC diagnostics screen Table6 14 Contents of the PLC diagnostics screen and the operation error history item Description of PLC diagnostics screen e e PLC diagnostics screen Performance Specification The history type is displayed Type Ope Operation history Err Error history 2 No The operation error number is displayed Ee The 4 digit code corresponding to the operation history and 8 Detailed code the CC Link Safety remote I O unit error history is displayed 5 38 If there is no detailed code is displayed TEA The operation content error message recorded in the Present error Error operation error history is displayed S Message If the history is damaged BROKEN OPERATION ERROR z LOG is displayed a b Operation error history details screen E When double clicking a history in the history list or an error currently occurring on e the PLC diagnostics screen the detailed information in Diagram 6 14 can be displayed 2 a Error details E T Operation details ern eae eee S 2 Operation attached information CPU A Abort code 5678 g Not
269. s 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 2 5 1 1 Memory configuration and storable data D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSEC LES eres 5 1 2 Program memory 1 Definition of program memory The program memory stores the program used by the CPU module to perform operation The program stored in the standard ROM is booted read to the program memory to perform operation 2 Storable data The program memory can store parameters programs device comments and user setting system area data Refer to Section 5 1 1 2 for the list of data that can be stored into program memory 4 POINT If the total volume of the data to be stored into the program memory exceeds its capacity examine reducing the user setting system area data 3 Before using the program memory Before using the program memory be sure to format it by GX Developer a Formatting When formatting display the PLC memory format screen with GX Developer Online Format PLC memory This is done selecting Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the PLC memory format screen Format PLC memory Connection target information Connection interface use ee PLC module Target PLC Station no Host PLC type 05001 Target memory Program memory Device memory Fd Format Type Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area Diagram 5 2 Prog
270. s 2 Write parameters and sequence program data to the program memory 3 Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM The standard ROM parameter and the sequence program are deleted c Precautions for standard ROM program execution 1 Files stored into standard ROM Before executing boot run store the following files into the standard ROM Parameter e Program e Device comment 1 Must be stored into the standard ROM 2 A sequence program is required 2 Online change during boot run If online change is made to a program in the program memory during boot run from the standard ROM the change is not updated on the program in the boot source standard ROM Hence write the program to the standard ROM K 3 3 in this section when the CPU module is put in a STOP status 3 When program memory contents change at power OFF ON or reset When you write the sequence program into program memory and switch the programmable controller power OFF ON or end the CPU module reset if the contents of the program memory change it is possible that boot operations are being used Refer to 2 b Operation to stop boot run in this section and stop the boot run 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 4 Standard ROM program execution boot run and writing D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSECIEN res 3 Write to standard ROM The program memory files a
271. s on the of Network parameter refer to the following manuals L gt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Networks 7 4 Communication with Ethernet Module Communication between the CPU module and the Ethernet module is performed by dedicated instructions For details on the dedicated instructions refer to Appendix 7 POINT When an Ethernet module is used with a safety CPU module the functions that can be used are restricted For details on the restrictions refer to Appendix 6 7 3 Communication with CC Link IE Controller Network Module or MELSECNET H Module COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC LES erie 7 5 Communication using intelligent function module dedicated instructions 1 2 3 Definition Intelligent function module dedicated instruction is an instruction for realizing easy programming to use the functions of intelligent function modules Processing of intelligent function module dedicated instructions Some intelligent function module dedicated instructions can specify a completion device The completion device turns ON for one scan after the instruction execution is completed If multiple intelligent function module dedicated instructions are used for the same intelligent function module create a program so that dedicated instructions are executed one by one following the compl
272. s settings for retentive timers are the same as those for low speed timers and high speed timers e Low speed retentive timer Same as low speed timer e High speed retentive timer Same as high speed timer POINT In order to use retentive timers a retentive timer number of points used setting must be designated at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 9 20 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSECIEN res 7 Timer Processing and accuracy a Processing method c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a When an OUT T instruction is executed the following is processed timer coil ON OFF current value update and contact ON OFF processing Timer current value update and contact ON OFF processing are not performed at END processing F Ladder example amp v X100 K10 c T aE OF Processing at execution of OUT TO instruction END OUT TO END o Sequence _ ao program 25 a Processing content 50 Coil ON OFF 2 z Current value update RIS Contact ON OFF EE Diagram 9 21 Processing at execution of OUT TO instruction 5 f 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 21 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES erie b Accuracy Measured value at END instruction is added to the current value when the OUT Ti instruction is executed If the timer coil is OFF when the OUT T instruction is executed th
273. s the target memory on the Read from PLC screen i 2 Click the Free space volume button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Py H 1 Select target memory e 2 Click Free space volumej pane 3 Memory capacity is displayed Diagram 5 5 Memory capacity checking procedure 5 1 Memories by CPU Module Me 5 1 3 Standard ROM Section title The section of the open page is shown at a glance In addition this manual provides the following explanations POINT Explains the matters to be especially noted the functions and others related to the description Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the convenient information A 19 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A 20 This manual is prepared for users to understand memory map functions programs and devices of the CPU module when you use QS Series programmable controllers The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 Describe the outline of the CPU module 2 Chapters 2 to 5 Describe the performance specifications executable program I O No and memory of the CPU module 3 Chapter 6 Describes the functions of the CPU modules 4 Chapter 7 Describes communication with intelligent function modules 5 Chapters 8 and9 Describe parameters and devices used in the CPU modules 6 Chapter 10 Describes the CPU mo
274. sist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16 bit units The most significant bit is sign bit Diagram 9 32 Bit configuration of data register x POINT Data register data are handled as signed data For HEX hexadecimal 0000H to FFFFH can be stored However since the most significant bit is a sign bit the range of a value that can be specified is 32768 to 32767 b When data register is used for 32 bit instruction If the data registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data will be stored in registers Dn and Dn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored at the data register No Dn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Dn 1 For example if register D12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in D12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in D13 H _ pwov ks00000 oa Processing object D12 D13 D13 D12 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits onc Diagram 9 33 Data transfer by 32 bit instruction and storage destination Two data registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from OH to FFFFFFFFH The most significant bit in a 32 bit configuration is a sign bit 3 Holding of stored data The data stored in the data register is held until the other data is stored The data stored in the data register is initialized when the programmable controller is powered O
275. sooseecoocoosoescecoecoosoescecoosoosoesocsoesoesoesoccocsosscesocsoesossessocsoesossessoesossse Q INTRODUCTION eseessessesoeccoosoesoesoccoosoescoosoecoesoosoesoecoosoesoesoecoosossoesocsoesossecsocsossossessoesossossessoo A _ 10 CONTENTS eeeeeceseoscecoecsosceseecoosooscesoecoesooseesoecoesoeseesoecoosoeseesocsoosoesoesocsossoesecsocsossoesessoesoseees A 10 ABOUT MANUALS seseeseeseescoeseecocsoosoesoccoosocsoesocooesoscecsocsocsossecsoccsoseoscecoecsossessecsecsossessessosoosse 17 HOW TO SEE THIS MANUAL IS ORGANIZED ssseseeseesoeseescecocsoccocccsecocsocsoesocsoesocssesocsoesoesoeseesoeso A 19 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL esessseseeseescescesoccoccossoecocooccoosocsoesocsoosoesoesoccoosoesoesocsoesoeseesoesoesoes A 2 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS essessessesseseessecoesocccseccsecoesocccecocsocsocsoesocsossocsoeseecoesoesoe A _ 21 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 11 1 1 Features cooococoooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 1 2 Program Storage and Operation cooooocoooooooooooooooooooooooo0ooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 1 3 Devices and Instructions Convenient for Programming coooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000 9 1 4 How to Check the Serial No and Function Version cocococooooooooooooooooooooooooooeoo00000000000000000000 10 CHAPTER2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2 1to2 2 CHAPTER3 SEQUENCE PROG
276. special registers SD561 and SD562 The continuous RUN operation time in TEST MODE can be checked by monitoring special registers SD561 and SD562 Also if the TEST MODE TIME EXCEEDED continuation error occurs special relay SM561 turns ON Table6 9 Special relay and special registers storing the results of measuring the TEST MODE continuous RUN time Special relay special register Description Remark number e Turns ON when the continuous RUN operation Updated when changed SM561 time in TEST MODE exceeds the continuous When the error is canceled SM561 is RUN tolerance time that has been set turned OFF e The continuous RUN operation time in TEST e Updated in the processing for the end of SD561 MODE is stored as a binary value in seconds each scan e The data is stored in the range 1 to e Continues storing of the measured 2147483647 values into memory even if the TEST When the measured value is cleared SD561 MODE TIME EXCEEDED continuation SD562 and SD562 are also cleared error occurs e When the error is canceled SD561 and SD562 are cleared 6 26 6 5 Setting to prevent continuous RUN in TEST MODE 6 FUNCTIONS MELEGEN erie 6 6 Checking the ROM write count The ROM write count is up to 100 000 When the ROM write count exceeds 100 000 the continuation error EXCEED MAX FLASH ROM REWRIT ERR error code 1610 occurs When the EXCEED MAX FLASH ROM REWRIT ERR error code 1610
277. strictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie TableApp 25 List of MC protocol functions 4E frame and QnA compatible 3E frame and their availability in the safety CPU module z continued 5 F Command RE 8 Function Type Availability 3 Subcommand a Directory file information read 1810 0000 O Directory file information search 1811 0000 O a New file creation 1820 0000 x 8 File delete H 1822 0000 x File copy 1824 0000 x 8 File File attribute modification 1825 0000 x aE File creation data modification 1826 0000 x File open 1827 0000 O File read m 1828 0000 O os File write 1829 0000 x gt File close aa 182A 0000 O ae 3E LED off Error code initialization 1617 000 o gt Loopback test 0619 0000 o e Unlock 1630 0000 o Remote password Lock 1631 0000 o O Available x Not available Appendices 1 The function which is supported on the Ethernet module side 2 Since the safety CPU module does not support the monitor data registration data is not updated even when the module operates normally Index Appendix 6 Restrictions on Using Ethernet Module with Safety CPU App 37 Module APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie b A compatible 1E frame TableApp 26 List of MC protocol functions A compatible
278. t detection programs created by the user c 2 w E s G x in Q 2 gt o a 2 Special relay and special registers at annunciator ON When annunciators switch ON a special relay SM62 switches ON and the Nos and quantity of the annunciators which switched ON are stored at the special registers SD62 to 79 e Special relay SM62 Switches ON if even one annunciator switches ON e Special register SD62 No of first annunciator which switched ON is stored CPU Module Processing Time here SD63 The number quantity of annunciators which are ON is stored here SD64 to 79 Annunciator Nos are stored in the order in which they switched ON The same annunciator No is stored at SD62 and SD64 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Annunciator numbers stored in SD62 are also recorded in the operation error history storage area Es POINT Even if multiple annunciators are switched ON while the programmable controller is power on only one annunciator number is stored in the operation error history storage area When an error is canceled on a CPU module the other annunciator numbers that are ON can be stored in the error history storage area Appendices Index 3 Applications of annunciators Using annunciators for a fault detection program an equipment fault or fault presence absence annunciator number can be checked by monitoring the special register
279. t of safety p1724 80 79 to 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 station on SD1725 96 95 to 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 CC Link IE SD1726 112 111 to 106 105 104 103 h02f101 100 99 98 97 Field SD1727 to 120 19 118 117 116 115 114113 Network released 1 to 120 in the table indicate station numbers Fixed to 0 1 This applies when the serial number first five digits of the CPU module is 13042 or later App 24 Appendix 2 Special Register List APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie Appendix 3 Parameter Number List The parameter number is stored into the special register SD16 to 26 when an error fi occurs in the parameter settings a This section describes the parameter number and the corresponding parameter setting area item in the list TableApp 18 Parameter number list F Item Parameter No Reference Label 0000 Section 8 1 1 Comment 00011 aE Type Model Section 4 3 I O assignment 2 Eao 0400 i 3 points Section 8 1 6 ok Start XY Start I O No 2 Base model name 5 5 Power model name Se Basic setting 04011 Section 8 1 6 85 Extension cable EE Slots Switch setting 0407 Section 8 1 6 CC Link IE Controller Network G N 05mnu Section 8 1 2 MELSECNETIH setting 7704P iO Ethernet setting 09mnu Section 8 2 3 EF Low speed Section 8 1 2 Timer limit setting
280. t only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Writing to ROM Set when writing to ROM Appendices For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks Manuals of each network module E POINT In the program that achieves the safety function only SD1000 to SD1299 can be used Special register other than SD1000 to SD1299 cannot be used in the program that achieves the safety function Index Appendix 2 Special Register List App 7 APPENDICES Number SDO 1 Diagnostic Information Name Diagnostic errors Meaning Diagnosis error code TableApp 10 Special register Explanation Error codes for errors detected by diagnostics are stored as BIN data Contents identical to latest error history information Set by When set S Error EL SEC TM eres SD1 SD2 SD3 SD4 App 8 Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence Error information categories Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence Error information category code Stores the year last two digits and month when SDO data was updated as BCD 2 digit code b15 to b8b7 to b0 Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 Example September 2006 H0609 Stores the day and hour when SDO data was updated as B
281. t the GX Developer and those shown in E boxes are performed in the CPU module Start GX Developer lt GX Developer Operating Manual Set the project Do you change the number of device points used Change the number of device points in device setting of PLC parameter Section 9 2 Ladder write screen Create a program to be executed inthe 777 CPU module 1 1 2 11 2 Procedure for writing program 1 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE M aL E0 QS series 1 Connect the personal computer which is installed with GX Developer to the CPU module Device Explanation Set the RUN STOP RESET switch to the STOP position and power ON the programmable controller the ERR LED turns on Time Set the CPU access password in GX Developer and register it in the CPU module p CPU Module Processing Choose Online Format PLC memory on GX Developer and format the program Write to PLC screen memory 2 3 gei o a 8 2 E d D a D Ss p 5 3 Q is B E Choose Online Write to PLC on GX JU Developer select Program memory and write the parameters created program to the program memory Freee o ui Switch the programmable controller power OFF amp drarroON or end the CPU module lt gt QSCPU User s Manual reset
282. t value update count value 1 The current value update count value 1 is performed at the leading edge OFF to ON of the OUT C instruction The current value is not updated in the following OUT C instruction statuses OFF ON to ON ON to OFF c 0 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a Ladder example 2 X100 K10 g i a o 8 Current value update timing 2 2 A END OUT C0 END OUT C0 END OUT C0 25 Sequence l program ON l E X100 oF _ f i i ES i i i 1 1 50 ON i i we CoilCO OFF l f 3E Q p Current value update Current value update Diagram 9 26 Current value update timing 5 f z 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 25 9 2 9 Counter C Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 26 MELSECIEN ries c Resetting the counter Counter current values are not cleared even if the OUT Ci instruction switches OFF Use the RST C instruction to clear the counter s current value and switch the contact OFF The count value is cleared and the contact is switched OFF at execution of when the RST C instruction Ladder example x100 RST CO Counter reset timing END RST CO END RST CO END RST CO Sequence I program ON i X100 OFF i i f Execution RST CO OFF y i instruction t j Count value cleared Count value cleared amp contact OFF amp contact OFF Diagram 9 27 Counter resetting 1 Precautions for reset
283. tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 19 9 2 8 Timer T Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aLS 26 Series 6 Retentive timers a Definition Retentive timers measure the coil ON time The measurement begins when the timer coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out coil OFF occurs Even when the timer coil is OFF the current value and the contact ON OFF status are saved When the coil is switched ON again the time measurement resumes from the current value which was saved b Retentive timer types There are 2 retentive timer types low speed retentive timer and high speed retentive timer c Retentive timer clear The RST ST instruction is used to clear reset the current value and switch the contact OFF Ladder example X100 K200 STO X100 ON time is measured as 20 seconds when the timer measures time in 100 ms units X102 Retentive timer display i f RST STO When X102 switches ON the STO contact is reset and the current value is cleared Time chart ON STO coil OFF om F 15s 5s STO present value OX to a X151 to 200 Xo Present value is saved when coil switches ON STO contact OFF L Contact remains ON when coil switches Instruction execution RST STO instruction mis X102 OFF Diagram 9 20 Ladder example and timing chart of retentive timer d Measurement units The measurement unit
284. tandard ROM Switch the programmable controller power OFF amp drarroON or end the CPU module reset Has the special relay SM660 turned ON L Section 5 1 4 GX Developer Operating Manual Diagram 11 2 Boot run flowchart 11 3 Boot run procedure APPENDICES MELSEC LES erie E T 5 Qa Appendix 1 Special Relay List a a Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the programmable controller 2 For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the A 4 Oo normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module O and remote I O modules zn The heading descriptions in the following special relay lists are shown in TableApp 1 SE TableApp 1 Descriptions of the special relay lists headings Item Function of Item g Number e Indicates special register number zs Name Indicates name of special register e O Meaning Indicates contents of special register 2 Explanation e Discusses contents of special register in more detail 3 a oO e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user Ser by pee for registers set by system Rihen eet Every END Set during ever
285. target QSCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QSCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU A0 A1 A2 B2 A3 A4 B4 A6 A7 B7 A9 B9 Access source GX Developer AO GX Developer A0 GOT AO GX Developer A1 GX Developer A2 GX Developer B2 G4 A2 GOT A2 GX Developer A3 GX Developer A4 GX Developer A4 GX Developer A4 GX Developer B4 GOT A5 GX Developer A6 GX Developer A7 GX Developer A7 GX Developer A7 GX Developer A7 GOT A7 GX Developer B7 GOT A8 GX Developer A9 GX Developer B9 G4 A9 GOT A9 CPU Module Processing Time Olxixixi xixixi x OlO OlOlxix xixixi x Olx gt gt E gt gt 2 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module OlOlxixi xixixi xixixix xixix x x x Appendices lt A A7 O Index xixixi xixixixi xix xixixixi xixi xixixi xixixi xiOlx x x xixixixi xixixixi x xixixi xixix xixixixi xiOlOlxix xix xixixixi xixixixi x xi xixi xixix xixixixi xiOlOlxix xix xixixi xixixixi xixixixi xiIOIOlIOlIOlIOIxlxixix xixix Olx xixixi xixixixi xixi xixixi OIOlIOlIOlIOIxlxixi xi xixix Olx xixixixi xixixixi xixixixiIOIOIO gt xlolololo ololol lx olxlololo N x O O O O O O OJO OJO SOIOJOJO O OJO x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x OJO OJO SOIOJOJSO O OJO x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x OIOIOIOIxIOIxIOIOIOIOIx x xixix xixixix xixi x x x x OJO
286. target memory on the Write to PLC screen and write data to the programmable controller Overview Write to PLC Connecting interface USB lt gt PLC module PLC Connection Station No Host PLC type QS001 Target memory Program memory Device memory Title File selection Device data Program Common Local Param Prog Select all Cancel all selections Close Performance Specification a 3p Program fi nnn Related functions F Device comment Transfer setup MAIN w Parameter PLC Network Remote operation Clear PLC memory Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions Format PLC memory Arrange PLC memory E T E Create title Total free space volume 127988 Bytes Diagram 5 4 Write to PLC screen 1 0 Nunber Assignment Ex POINT The file size has the minimum unit gt Section 5 3 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual file size ol 2 3 3 fe o Ss gt Fo D 2 as o x N T ae Cc o N AS fe E Functions Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 5 1 Memories by CPU Module 5 1 2 Program memory ol D D MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE MELSEGCIEN ries 5 1 3 Standard ROM 1 Definition of standard ROM The standard ROM is used to e
287. tchdog timer hereafter abbreviated to the WDT watches the scan time The default value is 200ms a WDT error A WDT error is 10ms When the WDT t is set to 10ms a WDT ERROR occurs within a scan time range of 10ms lt t lt 20ms b WDT Setting The WDT setting can be changed within a range of 10ms to 2000ms in the PLC RAS of the PLC parameter dialog box Setting unit 10ms QS Parameter PLC name PLC system Device Boot file 1 0 assignment Safety setting WDT Watchdog timer setting Error check i pa WDT Setting 200 ms 10ms 2000ms Initial execution E monitoring time ms 10ms 2000ms fii ee ms 10ms 2000ms Constant scanning monitoring time ms 1ms 2000ms Diagram 3 7 PLC RAS WDT Setting Function that repeats program at fixed intervals The constant scan function gt Section 6 9 allows a program to be executed repeatedly at fixed intervals When the constant scan is set a program is executed at intervals of the preset constant scan time 3 2 Concept of Scan Time 3 6 Communication with Intelligent Function Module Ex ge Se ao os of a oD se gt BO nO Performance Specification Overview oO Memories and Files a 2 2 nol g o S z S 5 oO oO x W 1 0 Nunber Assignment Handled by CPU Module Functions Parameters 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXECUTION MELSEC LES ries 3 3 Operation Processing This section explains the op
288. tes the processing time common to the CPU modules Table10 4 shows the common processing time for each CPU module model Table10 4 Common processing time CPU module Common processing time QS001CPU 6 2 to 10 0ms 10 5 10 1 Scan Time 10 1 2 Time required for each processing included in scan time 1 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME M aL 26 Qs ie 10 1 3 Factors that increase the scan time When the following functions or operations are performed this will increase the scan time of the CPU module When executing any of them make sure to allow for the processing time the value given in this section to the value calculated in Section 10 1 2 Device Explanation i 1 Online change executed in ladder mode The scan time increases by the value indicated in Table10 5 after online change D amp N N is B a 2 3 iS a O Time Table10 5 Increased time when online change is in ladder mode Increase in scan time when the online change is CPU module model name executed QS001CPU Max 13ms 2 Functions that increase scan time The scan time also increases by use of the following functions e System monitor Service processing Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module 3 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics The scan time increases by the value indicated in Table 10 6 when the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics is executed Appendices Table10 6 Increased time when the CC L
289. the number of occupied I O points can be designated The items other than designated are set to the status where the base unit is installed Overview 1 O assignment The I O assignment is conducted at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Performance Specification Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions Modelname Points stev Z Switch setting 4 5 lt Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically 2 Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur 2 Base setting e Base mode Base model name Power model name Extension cable Auto C Detail a pe 2 ExtBase2 ooo o o 8 lExBase3 o ooo o i gs ExtBase o o o ooo d i J T 125i Deran z 8 p 3 OO Sx _ReadPLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Diagram 4 3 I O assignment a Slot 2 S The slot number and what number of the main base unit the slot is are displayed What number of the main base unit the slot is means the number of slots from 0 slot of the main base unit b Type 5 j S Select Intelli for a slot where the Intelligent function module is mounted 53 m S5 Select Empty for an empty slot ue A F 232 If the type is not selected the type of the module actually mounted is used ESS oS p g oO S 4 3 VO Assignment by
290. the following instructions 1 RST F instruction The RST Fi instruction turns OFF an annunciator at leading eggs OFF to ON of the input condition If an annunciator is turned OFF by the RST F instruction processing at annunciator OFF shown in 9 2 4 6 b will be performed 2 OUT F instruction Although an annunciator can be turned ON OFF by OUT F instruction it takes time longer than when using the RST Fi instruction since every scan is processed However if an annunciator is switched OFF by the OUT F instruction the processing at annunciator OFF 6 b in this section is not performed Execute the RST F 3 instruction after the annunciator has been switched OFF by the OUT Fi instruction e When turning OFF annunciator 5 F5 Fault detection program g Annunciator ON program Display reset input RST F5 Program that turns OFF annunciator 5 F5 Diagram 9 12 Example of turning OFF the annunciators Refer to the following manual for details of each instruction LC QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 9 12 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 4 Annunciator F Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES res b Processing at annunciator OFF 1 Special register SD62 to 79 data operation when annunciator is tunred OFF by executing the RST F instruction e The annunciator No specified by the RST instruction is deleted and the stored annunciator Nos after the deleted annuncia
291. the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Assignment image Kil Diagram 8 9 Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards screen for CC Link IE Field Table8 11 List of CC Link IE Field Network setting items Item Parameter No Network type A0801 Starting I O No Network No Total stations Group No ANMO Station No Mode Network Configuration ee cds ANMES en Operation ANM3u Refresh parameters ANM1u Safet mmunication 8 11 8 2 Network Parameters Set the network parameters for CC Link IE Field Network Description Network setting Setting range Refer to the manual for CC Link IE Field Network Default value Reference PARAMETERS MELSEC LES res 2 CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNETI H setting Set the network parameters for CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H W Network parameters Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards f fel Module 1 Module 4 Network type CCIE Control Normal station Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Refresh parameters Specify station No by parameter Necessary setting No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Z Already set J Start 1 0 No Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module
292. ting data in the circuit mode during RUN Status Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN is a function to write a program during the CPU module RUN status Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN can be executed only at TEST MODE The program can be changed without stopping the process in CPU module program by performing writing data in the circuit mode during RUN status Performance Specification coe X100 X102 Bs 5 HH lt 100 gt FE oD 2 aa eae a ac a rs a aia as ry X106 X108 z oO SET M10 E l 2 1 X104 3 1 I he 1 1 I 5 ee et H 9 END GX Developer L me Change by GX Developer and write in z CPU module at the conversion E gt na Diagram 6 26 Outline of online change in ladder mode 3 Ee Ow Sr 2 Precautions Take a note of the following when online change is performed a Memory enabled for online change The memory that can be written during RUN is only program memory b Online change performed during boot run When writing during RUN is executed the boot source program is not changed Write the contents of program memory to standard ROM before the programmable controller power off or the CPU module reset after writing during RUN a 2 3 U c Number of steps enabled for online change at once The maximum of 512 steps can be written at once during RUN Allocate Memory for Online Change cannot be changed
293. ting screen Table6 19 Setting items on Remote password setting screen Item Description Setting range n Within 4 characters alphabets Password settings Enter the remote password numerals symbols Password active module Model name Select the module model QJ71E71 settings Start XY Set the start address of the module 0000 to O3E0 Detail en ee User connection No Set the user connection number Connection 1 to 16 Auto open UDP port GX Developer transmission 7 noe Specify the remote password valid System connection port TCP IP a es GX Developer transmission on port UDP IP e Connect GX Developer to the CPU module Write the set remote password to the CPU module The remote password becomes valid for the module when the programmable controller is powered OFF ON at power ON or the reset operation of the CPU module is performed at reset 6 62 6 16 Remote password 6 FUNCTIONS M BIRS AG QS b Changing the remote password In the project data list of GX Developer select Parameter Remote pass to display the remote password setting dialog box e Change the password and write it to the CPU module Overview c Click the Clear button to delete the set password In the project data list of GX Developer select Parameter Remote pass to display the remote password setting dialog box e Click the Clear button to delete the set password e
294. ting the counter When the RST C instruction is executed the coil of C also turns OFF If the execution condition of the OUT C instruction is still ON after execution of the RST C1 instruction the coil of C1 is turned ON at the execution of the OUT C instruction to update the current value increment the count value by 1 Ladder example Mo K10 c lt o co E RST CO Diagram 9 28 Counter resetting ladder example In the above ladder example when MO turns from OFF to ON the coil of CO turns ON updating the current value When CO reaches the preset value finally the contact of CO turns ON and the execution of the RST CO instruction clears the current value of CO At this time the coil of CO also turns OFF When M0 is still ON in the next scan the current value is updated since the coil of CO turns from OFF to ON at the execution of the OUT CO instruction The current value turns to 1 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 9 Counter C Q DEVICE EXPLANATION MELSEC LES res END OUTCO RSTCO END OUT CO RSTCO END Sequence I I I I I I program ON MO OFF ON c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 S o a Coil of CO OFF Current value is updated Coil of CO OFF since coil of CO turns from OFF to ON Current value update amp contact ON RSTCO OFF CPU Module Processing Time Count value cleared amp contact OFF Diagram 9 29 Current value update timing To
295. tion There are continuation errors error that occurred last is retained remaining that have not been canceled J All the continuation errors are OFF No error canceled 41 1 When error code 1600 BATTERY ERROR occurs only the BAT LED lights up When error code 1600 is canceled the BAT LED goes out 2 When error code 9000 F occurs only the USER LED lights up When error code 9000 is canceled the USER LED goes out POINT 1 When the error code for the error to be canceled is stored in SD50 and the error is canceled the bottom 1 digit code number is ignored Example If error code 2100 or 2106 occurred when error code 2100 is canceled error code 2106 is canceled too If error code 2100 or 2125 occurred even when error code 2100 is canceled error code 2125 is not canceled 2 Ifan error occurred due to a cause other than the CPU module even if the error is canceled using a special relay SM50 and special register SD50 the cause of the error cannot be eliminated Example For INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE DOWN because this error occurred in the base unit intelligent module or the like even if the error is canceled using a special relay SM50 and special register SD50 the cause of the error cannot be eliminated Refer to the error code list in the QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and eliminate the cause of the error 6 34 6 7 Self diagnostics Function 6 7
296. tion with Module Parameters 6 2 Safety CPU Operation Mode 6 2 3 Safety CPU operation mode switching o gt D 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LES erie 6 2 4 Operation of each function in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status Table6 5 shows whether each function can be executed or not in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status Table6 5 Whether each function can be executed or not in each safety CPU operation mode and CPU operation status Safety CPU operation mode Test mode During During CPU operation status Stoperror switching initial parar 4 from STOP tal to RUN processing 1 Execution of program x x x x RY RWw Oo oO 2 x x x CPU CC Link refresh SB SW O O x RX RWr x CC Link gt CPU refresh O O 2 CC Link Safety O O O x RY to o external x Operation of CC Link output O O OFF output O remote I O station external z output to RX O O O O Safety SPU p YME pe 3 x x x CC LinkiE S ST D W O O Field aion Network Standard RY RWw O o 3 x x x refresh communic a CC Link IE ation S5 SW O O x x x Field Network Safety CC Link IE communic X M B D W O O x x x Field atten Network CPU Standard RX RWr O O x x x communic refresh ae SB SW o o O 7 z CPU CC Link IE B W O o 7 X F F Controller Network CC Link IE OR SB SW 6 y z 7 4 Controller Network CC Link IE Controller B
297. tor No are shifted up e If the annunciator No stored at SD64 was switched OFF the new c 2 w E s G x if Q 2 S o a annunciator No which is stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 8 e 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value amp e If the SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF 3 SET F50 SETF25 SET F1023 RST F25 RE A n a Na sD62 0o gt 50 50 50 50 sD63 O 1 2 3 2 2 sD64 0 50 50 50 50 23 gt spD65 0 ol 25 25 F 1023 E SD66 0 0 gt a 7 0 sD67 0 0 0 0 8 5 a oa oe oe oe a ee ee Bie sD79 0 0 0 0 0 Diagram 9 13 Processing at annunciator OFF when RST F instruction is executed 2 LED indication When the annunciator Nos in SD64 to 79 all turn OFF the USER LED 8 which was turned ON as the annunciator turned ON turns OFF 2 lt f g 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 13 9 2 4 Annunciator F Q DEVICE EXPLANATION 9 14 9 2 5 Edge relay V MELSECIEN res 1 Definition An edge relay is a device which stores the operation results ON OFF information from the beginning of the ladder block Edge relays can only be used at contacts and cannot be used as coils X100 X102 X104 V1 A 2 Precautions __ Edge relay Stores the X100 X102 and X104 operation results Diagram 9 14 Edge relay The edge relay of the same No cannot be set in multiple steps of a progr
298. truction 2 Input X can also be used as following devices e Destination device on the CPU module side to where remote input RX of CC Link Safety and CC Link IE Field Network is refreshed e Destination device on the CPU module side of CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H refresh 9 2 Internal User Devices 9 2 1 Input X Q DEVICE EXPLANATION M aL 26 Qs em 9 2 2 Output Y 1 Definition Outputs give out the program control results to the external devices such as solenoid electromagnetic switch signal lamp and digital display Outputs give out the result equivalent to one N O contact c 2 w E s G x ui Q 2 gt o a Signal lamp 7 amp x 8 Re sds 3 OF Output Y Digital display Sequence operation E 28 ZS Contact gt b o 2 BS 29 aga Diagram 9 6 Output from CPU module to external devices 2 Number of used N O and NIC contacts There are no restrictions on the number of output Yn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded 2 Programmable No restrictions on the quantity used E controller f x Program Out ladder external device Diagram 9 7 Use of output Y in program 3 Using outputs as internal relays M An output Y corresponding to a region with no module mounted can be used in place of an internal relay M Empty slots o
299. ts stored at the request of Customer or because Customer refuses or delays shipment shall be at the risk and expense of Customer c MELCO shall not be liable for any damage to or loss of the Products or any delay in or failure to deliver service repair or replace the Products arising from shortage of raw materials failure of suppliers to make timely delivery labor difficulties of any kind earthquake fire windstorm flood theft criminal or terrorist acts war embargoes governmental acts or rulings loss or damage or delays in carriage acts of God vandals or any other circumstances reasonably beyond MELCO s control 5 Choice of Law Jurisdiction These terms and any agreement or contract between Customer and MELCO shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of laws To the extent any action or dispute is not arbitrated the parties consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the federal and state courts located in the Southern District of the State of New York Any judgment there obtained may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction 6 Arbitration Any controversy or claim arising out of or relating to or in connection with the Products their sale or use or these terms shall be settled by arbitration conducted in accordance with the Center for Public Resources CPR Rules for Non Administered Arbitration of International Disputes by a sole arbitrator chosen from the CPR s panels
300. uals Manual Name QSCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Explains the specifications of the QSCPU safety power supply modules and safety base unit Sold separately QSCPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Explains how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions and QSCPU dedicated instructions Sold separately CC Link Safety System Master Module User s Manual Explains the specifications procedures and settings before operation parameter settings and troubleshooting of the QS0J61BT12 CC Link Safety system master module Sold separately CC Link Safety System Remote I O Module User s Manual Explains the specifications procedures and settings before operation parameter settings and troubleshooting of the CC Link Safety system remote I O modules Sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080626ENG 13JR92 SH 080628ENG 13JW01 SH 080600ENG 13JR88 SH 080612ENG 13JR89 MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Explains the specifications procedures and settings before operation parameter settings and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module with safety functions Sold separately SH 080969ENG 13JZ53 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Explains the system configuration performance specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting of CC Link IE Co
301. ued a N lt 2 Limits of Warranties a MELCO does not warrant or guarantee the design specify manufacture construction or installation of the materials construction criteria functionality use properties or other characteristics of the equipment systems or production lines into which the Products may be incorporated including any safety fail safe and shut down systems using the Products b MELCO is not responsible for determining the suitability of the Products for their intended purpose and use including determining if the Products provide appropriate safety margins and redundancies for the applications equipment or systems into which they are incorporated c Customer acknowledges that qualified and experienced personnel are required to determine the suitability application design construction and proper installation and integration of the Products MELCO does not supply such personnel d MELCO is not responsible for designing and conducting tests to determine that the Product functions appropriately and meets application standards and requirements as installed or incorporated into the end user s equipment production lines or systems e MELCO does not warrant any Product 1 repaired or altered by persons other than MELCO or its authorized engineers or FA Centers 2 subjected to negligence carelessness accident misuse or damage 3 improperly stored handled installed or maintained 4 integrated or used in co
302. unciator F goes ON ins j nn detection ON Detected execution Appendix 1 Special Relay List Corresponding CPU Qs APPENDICES 2 System information TableApp 3 Special relay AG Qs ie 7 Set by Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set SM203 STOP contact STOP status Turns ON when the CPU is in STOP status S Status change e Writes clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 SM210 Clock data set OFF Ignored to the CPU module after the END instruction U request ON Set request of the scan where the relay changes OFF to ON has been executed Turns ON when an error is detected in the OFF No error SM211 Clock data error ON Error clock data SD210 to SD213 and turns OFF S Request if no error is detected SM213 Clock data read OFF Ignored Reads clock data to SD210 to SD213 in BCD U request ON Read request value when the relay is ON OFF Within the number SM232 Number of of writes Turns ON when the number of writes to ROM S Error writes to ROM ON Over the number of writes exceeds 100 000 Appendix 1 Special Relay List Corresponding CPU Qs App 3 Device Explanation CPU Module Processing Time Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index APPENDICES 3 System clocks counters TableApp 4 Special relay AG Qs ies
303. ve completion 1PLS signal signal status device signal M5000 35l ZP BUFRCV uo K1 D5000 D500 M500 Receive BUFRCV instruction instruction 1PLS completion device M500 M501 A 48 1 F Normal completion processing BUFRCV BUFRCV SS SS eS SS SS SS SS SS ee SS eS N E instruction instruction completion abnormal device completion device M501 Se es ee eg L Abnormal completion processing j BUFRCV instruction abnormal completion device Fig App 3 Program example using I O signals App 44 Appendix 7 Dedicated Instructions which can be used in Safety CPU Module APPENDICES AG Qs ie 4 BUFSND instruction Fig App 4 shows a program example where buffer memory addresses are replaced with I O signals in the program for sending data from the fixed buffer of the connection No 1 TableApp 33 Buffer memory address I O signal correspondence Buffer memory address O signal in hexadecimal decimal 50004 20480 Open completion signal X10 Connection 1 open completion When the I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F lt lt lt Fixed buffer No 1 sending program gt gt gt M3100 X19 X10 o PLS M3000 Send Initial Connection Send instruction normal 1 open instruction completion completion 1PLS signal signal M3000 24 Mov K3 D300 Send Send data instruction length setting 1PLS number of words Mov K1234 D301
304. word registration change screen Q 2 3 8 ge To PO o gt F a E gel OG a 2 3 U Communication with Intelligent Function Module Parameters 6 3 CPU access password o gt 6 FUNCTIONS 6 20 MELSECIEN rics b Types and number of characters that can be used for CPU access passwords Set a CPU access password made up of 6 14 single byte Latin letters numbers and symbols the shaded section of Table6 7 Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated Table6 7 Characters that can be used for CPU access passwords 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y 8 9 EJPOINT 1 At the factory setting CPU access password is not set in the CPU module When using the CPU module set the CPU access password with GX Developer and register it in the CPU module GX Developer online operation is not possible unless the CPU access password is registered to the CPU module 2 The user must manage the CPU access password carefully Ifa CPU access password has already been set in the CPU module writing data to the programmable controller is not possible unless that same password is set in the GX Developer project Also the set password cannot be changed If you lose the CPU access password it is necessary to initialize the CPU module by initializing the PLC memory then write the project to the programmable c
305. x 2 2 Mode Safety remote net er 1 mode v G 3 ssi 156kbps X E Safety refresh monitoring time 200 8 Safety data monitoring time 400 v Link ID o e All connect count 64 Remote inputf Ax Remote outputfRY Remote register Rw Remote registerR ww Special relay SB _ o Special register SW 5 Retry count ces Automatic reconnection station count oo 2 PLC down select Stop ie s 8 Scan mode settin Synchronous a Delay infomation setin 8 amp 5 Station information settin Station information 655 Remote device station initial setting se 8 0 OX 9 O m Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Set if itis needed No setting Already set Setting item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear 3 i 42 8 Diagram 8 12 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lt 3 e Z Q Table8 14 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Number of CC Link C000x 2 no Starting I O No g Operational settings ma gO Type oo 5 pO EG Station No 53 E Master station data link 5 type Mode CNM2u Transmissionspeed Safety refresh monitoring time Safety data monitoring time S Link ID Set the CC Link safety Refer to the CC Link safety 3 parameters Manual ie All connect count Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr CNM1u c Remote register RWw z S o Special relay SB 3 S O Special register SW 55 ESS Retry c
306. xecute boot run by the CPU module The standard ROM is used to save programs and parameters without battery backup The program stored in the standard ROM is booted read to the program memory gt Section 5 1 2 to perform operation 2 Storable data The standard ROM can store parameters programs and device comments Refer to Section 5 1 1 2 for the list of data that can be stored into each memory 3 Checking the memory capacity To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Standard ROM as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the Free space volume button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field 1 Select target memory Read from PLC Connecting interface use lt gt PLC module PLC Connection Station No Host PLC type S001 Target memory Standard ROM zi Ne selection Device data Program Execute Param Prog Cancel all selections Close 5 E Program i MAIN 06 04 25 16 23 54 21 Related functions Ei Parameter Transfer setup PLC Network 06 04 25 16 23 50 A Remote operation lt Clear PLC memory Format PLC memory Refresh view ss Arrange PLC memory Create title Total free space volume 127988 Bytes k 2 Click Free space volume E 3 Memory capacity is displayed Diagram 5 5 Memory capacity checking procedu
307. y END processing 8 Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN 2 Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks Manuals of each network module E POINT In the program that achieves the safety function only SM1000 to SM1299 can be used Special relay other than SM1000 to SM1299 cannot be used in the program that achieves the safety function Index Appendix 1 Special Relay List App 1 APPENDICES 1 Diagnostic Information TableApp 2 Descriptions of the special relay headings AG Qs ies App 2 Set b Number Name Meaning Explanation ais an Turns ON when an error is detected by diagnostics Di ti OFF N SMO Agn SSG Sena Includes when an annunciator is ON S Error errors ON Error Be eS e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter Turns ON when an error is detected by self di ti F p OFF No self diagnosis PAE Fa F Self diagnosis Does not include when an annunciator is SM1 crror errors ON S Error ON Self di i E ERR e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter OFF No error common SM5 o common information
308. ystem setting list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Timer limit Low speed 4000 Set the time limit of the low ims to 1000ms 1ms unit 100ms Section 9 2 8 setting High speed 5 speed timer high speed timer 0 1ms to 100 0ms 0 1ms unit 10 0ms Section 9 2 8 Set the contact that controls RUN PAUSE contact 10014 RUN of the CPU module XO to 17FF No setting Section 6 12 1 Set enable disable of remote Remote reset 10021 reset operation from GX Enable Disable Enable Section 6 12 2 Developer Set the output Y status when Provide output Y status before F tput mode at STOP t Provid tput Y Output modegt STONO 10031 the STOP status is switchedto STOP Clear output Y output P E output Y Section 6 10 Run status before STOP the RUN status one scan later 5 k 0 points 16 points 32 points 64 Points oc d mpt Set th ber of ty slot onte occupiodiby empiy 1007 et tae number of empty Sots on cints 128 points 256 points 512 16 points Section 4 2 1 slot the main base unit A points 1024 points 8 1 PLC Parameters Continued on next page PARAMETERS MELSEC LES erie 3 PLC RAS Make the various settings for the RAS function QS Parameter PLC name PLC system PLCRAS Device Bootfile 1 0 assignment Safety setting WDT Watchdog timer setting WDT Setting 200 ms 10ms 2000ms Constant scanning ms 1ms 2000ms E

QSCPU User`s Manual (Function Explanation, Program

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents